You are on page 1of 352

FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL ENGLISH

CD RECEIVER KD-AR870/KD-G820

RECEPTOR CON CD KD-AR870/KD-G820

RECEPTEUR CD KD-AR870/KD-G820

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.


Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 8.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.


For customer Use:
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
Enter below the Model
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or
bottom of the cabinet.
Retain this information
INSTRUCTIONS for future reference.
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS Model No.
Serial No.

GET0359-001A
[J]

Cover_KD-AR870_820[J]1.indd 2 5/12/05 4:54:26 pm


Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
ENGLISH

INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)


This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS


1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.

How to reset your unit How to forcibly eject a disc

“Please Eject” appears on the display.

Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Caution:
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user ’s authority to operate the
equipment.

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 2 9/12/05 4:38:38 pm


How to use the MODE/SEL button
If you use MODE or SEL (select), the display
CONTENTS

ENGLISH
and some controls (such as the number buttons,
4/¢ buttons, 5/∞ buttons, and the Control panel — KD-AR870 and KD-G820 ....... 5
control dial) enter the corresponding control
mode. Remote controller — RM-RK50 ................. 6
Getting started ................................. 7
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after Basic operations ................................................... 7
pressing MODE, to operate the FM
tuner. Radio operations .............................. 9
Disc/USB memory operations............. 11
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 11
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................ 11
Playing a USB memory ......................................... 12
Sound adjustments ........................... 16
General settings — PSM ................... 18
Title assignment............................... 27
Satellite radio operations.................. 28
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 32
Other external component
Works as time countdown indicator. operations .................................... 34
More about this unit ......................... 35
To use these controls for original functions Maintenance .................................... 39
again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
of these buttons until the control is cleared. Troubleshooting ............................... 40
• Pressing MODE again also restores original Specifications ................................... 45
functions. However, pressing SEL makes the
unit enters a different mode.

For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as
this will block outside sounds, making driving
dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any
complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...


If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
the car becomes normal before operating the
unit.
3

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 3 9/12/05 10:55:07 am


How to read this manual Caution:
• Button operations are mainly explained with
If the temperature inside the car is below
ENGLISH

the illustrations in the table below.


0°C, the movement of animation and text
• Some related tips and notes are explained in
scroll will be halted on the display to prevent
“More about this unit” (see pages 35 – 38).
the display from being blurred.
appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, and the
Press briefly.
operating temperature is resumed, these
functions will start working again.

Press repeatedly.

Warning:
Press either
one. If you need to operate the unit while driving,
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be
involved in a traffic accident.
Press and hold until your
desired response begins.

Press and hold both Caution on volume setting:


buttons at the same time.
Discs produce very little noise compared
with other sources. Lower the volume
The following marks are used to indicate... before playing a disc to avoid damaging
: Built-in CD player operations. the speakers by the sudden increase of the
output level.
: External CD changer operations.

: External USB memory operations.

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 4 5/12/05 4:52:28 pm


Control panel — KD-AR870 and KD-G820

ENGLISH
Parts identification

1 BAND button 7 EQ (equalizer) button


2 • Control dial 8 0 (eject) button
• (standby/on attenuator) button 9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
3 DISP (display) button p SRC (source) button
4 Remote sensor q (control panel release) button
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to w SEL (select) button
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial e MODE button
lighting). r Number buttons
5 Display window t 4/¢ buttons
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

How to detach/attach the control panel


Detaching... Attaching...

Lever CAUTION:
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while
the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back
into lock position before attaching the panel.

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 5 9/12/05 9:50:35 am


Remote controller — RM-RK50
ENGLISH

Installing the lithium coin battery Caution:


(CR2025)

Main elements and features


Aim the remote controller directly at the
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is
no obstacle in between.

Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may
explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other
metallic materials. 1 (standby/on/attenuator) button
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or • Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
similar tools. attenuates the sound when the power is on.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate • Turns the power off if pressed and held.
when throwing away or saving it. 2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
USB.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an
MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.
• While listening to the satellite (SIRIUS or
XM) radio:
– Changes the categories.

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 6 5/12/05 4:52:30 pm


• While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
JVC D. player: Getting started
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

ENGLISH
D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now Basic operations
5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
~ Turn on the power.
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
4 SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (i-EQ: intelligent

5
equalizer).
SOURCE button
Ÿ
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
*1 Only for KD-AR870.
• While listening to the satellite radio:
*2 You cannot select these sources if they
– Changes the channels if pressed briefly.
are not ready or not connected.
– Changes the channels rapidly if pressed
and held.
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player
!
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,
• For FM/AM tuner
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and
held.
• For SIRIUS tuner
* 5 U: Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞: Confirms the selection.
• For XM tuner

⁄ Adjust the volume.

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See


pages 16 – 18.)

Continued on next page...


7

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 7 5/12/05 4:52:31 pm


To drop the volume in a moment (ATT) To check the current clock time when the
power is turned off
ENGLISH

To restore the sound, press it


again.

To turn off the power


Changing the display pattern

Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source


Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
18 – 21.
Source operation display
1

2-1 Canceling the display


demonstrations “SMALL” (CD jacket image) graphic*1 is displayed.
Turn the control dial to set “Demo/Link”
to “Off.”
*2
2-2 Setting the clock
1 Press number button 4 ( ).
“Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then, “LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed.
turn the control dial to adjust the
hour.
2 Press ¢ to select “Clock Min”
(minute). Then, turn the control
dial to adjust the minute. Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 19).
3 Press ¢ to select “24H/12H.”
Then, turn the control dial to select
“12Hours” or “24Hours,” time Goes back to the initial display pattern.
display mode.
*1 You can use your edited file for graphic screen
(see pages 22 – 25).
3 Exit from the setting.
Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
a longer time to show it on the display.
*2 The information bar will disappear if no
operation is performed for five seconds.

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 8 20/12/05 3:44:53 pm


When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
Radio operations receive

ENGLISH
1
~
2

! Start searching for a station. 3 Exit from the setting.

When a station is received, searching lights up on the display.


stops. Reception improves, but stereo effect will
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast be lost.
with sufficient signal strength,
lights up on the display. To restore the stereo effect, select “Mono Off”
in step 2. goes off.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.

To tune in to a station manually


Storing stations in memory
In step ! above...
1 You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—


SSM (Strong-station Sequential
2 Select a desired station frequency. Memory)
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you
want to store into.

Continued on next page...


9

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 9 5/12/05 4:52:47 pm


3 Select “SSM.” Using the Preset Station List
• When appears on the display, you can
ENGLISH

move back to the previous display by pressing


number button 3.

1 Follow steps 1 and 2 on left column.


4 • By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List
will appear (go to step 4 below).

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are


searched and stored automatically in the FM
band. 3 Display the Preset Station List.

Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.

Using the number buttons


1
4 Select the preset number you want to
store into.
2

• You can move to the lists of the other FM


bands by pressing number button 5
3 ( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly.

5 Store the station.

10

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 10 5/12/05 4:52:48 pm


Listening to a preset station Disc/USB memory

ENGLISH
Using the number buttons operations
1
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
change the source or eject the disc.
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you
want to listen to.

or

To stop playback and eject the disc

Using the Preset Station List


Playing discs in the CD changer
1 Display the Preset Station List, then All discs in the magazine will be played
select the preset station you want to repeatedly until you change the source.
listen to. • Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

2 Change to the selected station. ~

* If you have changed the external input


setting to “Ext In” (see page 21), you
cannot select the CD changer.

Ÿ Select a disc.
For disc number from 01 – 06:

For disc number from 07 – 12:

11

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 11 5/12/05 4:52:51 pm


Playing a USB memory Track and folder information (CD/CD Text/
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a MP3/WMA/USB)
ENGLISH

USB memory.
Once you insert a disc or attach a USB
All tracks in the USB memory will be played
memory, the total track number/total
repeatedly until you change the source.
playing time (for CD/CD Text) and total
• Removing the USB memory will also stop
folder number/total track number (for MP3/
playback.
WMA/USB) appears, then the following
~ information appears...

Ex.: When “CD-CH” is selected as the source

Current folder number*1


Current disc number*2 Elapsed playing time
File type*1*3 Current track number

Ÿ USB input terminal


• For the audio CD or CD Text:
Disc name*4 and Track name*5
• For the MP3/WMA/USB:
Folder name and File name, or
Album/performer*6 and Track name*6

USB memory • When playing CD changer, the total


numbers will not appear.
If a USB memory has been attached...
*1 Displayed only when an MP3/WMA
track is played back.
*2 Displayed only when “CD-CH” is selected
as the source.
*3 Either MP3 or WMA indicator lights up
depending on the detected file.
Playback starts from where it has been stopped
*4 Appears only for CD Texts and CDs if
previously.
it has been recorded or assigned. (“No
• If a different USB memory is currently
Name” appears if no name is recorded or
attached, playback starts from the beginning.
assigned.)
*5 Appears only for CD Texts. (“No Name”
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it
appears if no name is recorded.)
out from the unit.
*6 Appears only when “Tag” is set to “On”
(see page 20).
Cautions:
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might
hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all the important data has been
backed up to avoid losing the data.

12

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 12 5/12/05 4:52:52 pm


About MP3 and WMA tracks To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and MP3/WMA/USB)

ENGLISH
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

When an MP3/WMA folder in an MP3/


WMA disc includes an image <jtw> file
edited by Image Converter (Ver 3.0)—
supplied in the CD-ROM, you can show the For the main unit:
image on the display while the tracks in the • Holding either of the buttons can display the
folder are played back—Image Link. (See Folder List (see page 14).
pages 19 and 37 for details.) For CD changer:
• Holding either of the buttons can display the
Disc List (see page 14).
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
compatible CD changer with your unit. (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. These units, however, are not
compatible with MP3 discs. To select a number from 01 – 06:
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD
changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD To select a number from 07 – 12:
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text
compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track • To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/


USB, it is required that folders are assigned
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks To select a particular track in a folder (for


MP3/WMA/USB):

13

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 13 5/12/05 4:52:55 pm


Other main functions 5 Change to the selected item.
ENGLISH

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

• When appears on the display, you can • The list disappears and playback starts.
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
1
Only possible on JVC
2 Select “LIST.” MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks


within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track


whose number is a single digit (1 to 9).
3 Select the list type.

Each time you press the button, you can


skip 10 tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be
*1 Selectable only when the source is selected and vice versa.
“CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the media is MP3,
WMA, or USB. 3

4 Select an item.

EX.: When “File” is selected in step 3

• You can move to the other lists by


pressing number button 5 ( ) or
6( ) repeatedly.

14

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 14 12/28/05 7:29:59 PM


Prohibiting disc ejection 7 Repeat play
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

ENGLISH
• “No Eject” appears on the display. Mode Plays repeatedly
Track: The current track [ ].
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder
procedure. [ ].
• “Eject OK” appears on the display. Disc*2: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

Selecting the playback modes


7 Random play
You can use only one of the following playback
modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode. Mode Plays at random


7 Intro play Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on [ ].
Disc*3: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
All*4: All tracks of the inserted discs
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Mode Plays beginning 15 seconds of...
*1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/
Track: All tracks of the current disc or USB).
USB memory [ ]. *2 Only while playing discs in the CD
Folder*1: First tracks of all folders changer.
[ ]. *3 Only while playing a disc.
Disc*2: First tracks of all the inserted *4 Only while playing discs in the CD
discs [ ]. changer or playing a USB memory.
Off: Cancels.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

15

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 15 20/12/05 3:45:46 pm


2 Use 4/¢ to select a
Sound adjustments cutoff frequency to the subwoofer.
• 80Hz: Frequencies higher than
ENGLISH

80 Hz are cut off.


Adjusting the sound • 120Hz: Frequencies higher than
120 Hz are cut off.
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your • 160Hz: Frequencies higher than
preference. 160 Hz are cut off.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing 3 Turn the control dial to adjust the
number button 3. subwoofer output level. [0 to 8]

C VolAdjust
1 Turn the control dial to adjust the input
level of each source (except FM).
[–5 to +5]
2 Adjust to match the input level of the
FM sound level.
• Before making an adjustment, select a
source you want to adjust.

D Loudness
• For “EQ” setting, see the following.
Turn the control dial to activate or
deactivate the loudness to produce a
3 Adjust the selected setting item. well-balanced sound at low volume
levels. [Off or On]
A Fad/Bal (Fader/Balance)
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to
move to the “Fad/Bal” adjustment 4 Exit from the setting.
display.
2 Adjust the speaker output balance
by pressing:
5 / ∞: between the front and rear
speakers. [F06 to R06]
4/¢ :
between the left and right
Selecting preset sound modes
speakers. [L06 to R06] (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to
B Subwoofer the music genre.
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment Available sound modes
display.
FLAT (No sound mode is applied), H.ROCK
(Hard rock), R & B (Rhythm & blues),
POP, JAZZ, DANCE, COUNTRY, REGGAE,
CLASSIC, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3

16

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 16 17/12/05 2:55:04 pm


Storing your own sound modes Sound Range/selectable items
elements Low Mid High

ENGLISH
You can adjust the sound modes and store your
own adjustments in memory. Level –06 to –06 to –06 to
• When appears on the display, you can +06 +06 +06
move back to the previous display by pressing FREQ 60 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz
number button 3. (Frequency) 80 Hz 1 kHz 12.5kHz
100 Hz 1.5kHz 15 kHz
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
Q (Band Q1.0 Q0.5 Fix
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 16. Q2.0 Q1.25
• In step 2, select “EQ.”
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
2 Select a sound mode. frequency ranges.

6 Store the adjustments.

To display the rest

3 Select a frequency range.

4 Adjust the sound elements of the


selected frequency range.
1 Use 5 / ∞ to adjust the level.
2 Press number button 2 ( ),
then turn the control dial to select the
frequency.
3 Press number button 2 ( ), then
turn the control dial to select the band
width.

17

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 17 20/12/05 3:49:36 pm


The list below shows the preset value setting for each sound mode:
Preset values
ENGLISH

Sound Low Mid High


modes Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band
(Frequency) width) (Frequency) width) (Frequency) width)
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
H.ROCK +03 100 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
JAZZ +03 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz Fix
DANCE +04 60 Hz Q1.0 -02 1 kHz Q1.0 +01 10 kHz
COUNTRY +02 60 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.0 +02 12.5kHz
REGGAE +03 60 Hz Q1.25 +02 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 12.5kHz
CLASSIC +01 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz

General settings — PSM


Basic procedure 3 Select a PSM item.

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)


items listed (except “Sirius ID”) in the table that
follows. • By pressing either of the buttons
repeatedly, you can also move to the item
1 of the other categories.

4 Adjust the selected PSM item.

An item previously selected appears on the


display.
2 Select a PSM category.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust other
PSM items if necessary.

6 Exit from the setting.


To display the rest

18

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 18 20/12/05 3:49:39 pm


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Demo/Link Demo: [Initial]; Display demonstration will be

ENGLISH
Display activated automatically, [8].
demonstration Image Link: To show a still image while playing MP3/
WMA tracks, [13, 37].
Off: Cancels.
• Still image appears if no operation is done for about
MOVIE

20 seconds.
LevelMeter You can select the different level meter patterns.
Audio level meter Meter 1 [Initial] O Meter 2
• Press DISP repeatedly to show the selected level meter.
Pict Download: [Initial]; Download files, [22].
Pictures Set: Activate the stored files, [25]
Delete: Delete the stored files, [23].
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [8]
Hour adjustment [Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
Clock Min 00 – 59, [8]
Minute adjustment [Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
24H/12H 12Hours – 24Hours, [8]
Time display mode [Initial: 12Hours]
Clock Adj*1 Auto: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically
Automatic clock adjusted using the clock data provided via
CLOCK

adjustment the satellite radio channel.


Off: Cancels.
Time Zone*1*2 Select your residential area from one of the following time
Time zone zones for clock adjustment.
Eastern [Initial] O Atlantic O Newfndlnd (Newfoundland)
O Alaska O Pacific O Mountain O Central O (back to
the beginning)
DST*1*2 Activate this if your residential area is subject to DST.
Daylight saving time On: [Initial]; Activates daylight savings time.
Off: Cancels.
Scroll Once: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.
DISPLAY

Scroll Auto: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals).


Off: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the
display regardless of the setting.
*1 Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected.
*2 Adjustable only when “Clock Adj” is set to “Auto.” Press number button 1 ( ) to show the
setting display.

Continued on next page...


19

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 19 12/28/05 6:46:11 PM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Dimmer Auto: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on
ENGLISH

Dimmer the headlights.


Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Time Set: Set the timer for dimmer, [25].
Any hour – Any hour
From – To*3: [Initial: 6PM – 7AM]
Contrast 1 – 10: [Initial: 5]; Adjust the display contrast to
Contrast make the display indications clear and
legible.
DISPLAY

LCD Type Negative: [Initial]; Negative pattern of the display


Display type (except still images and animation).
Auto: Positive pattern will be selected during the
day time*4; while negative pattern will be
used during the night time*4.
Positive: Positive pattern of the display.
Font Type You can select the font type used on the display.
Font type 1 [Initial] O 2
Tag On: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information display
Tag display while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].
Off: Cancels.
IF Band Auto: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to
Intermediate reduce interference noises between close
frequency filter stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference noises from
adjacent stations, but sound quality will
not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
AreaChange US [Initial]; When using in North/Central/
TUNER

Tuner channel South America. AM/FM intervals are set to


interval 10 kHz/200 kHz.
SA When using in South American countries
where FM interval is 100 kHz. AM interval is
set to 10 kHz.
EU When using in any other areas. AM/FM
intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz
during auto search).
Sirius ID*5 The 12-digits SIRIUS identification number appears on the
SIRIUS ID display, [28].

20

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 20 5/12/05 4:53:31 pm


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Ext Input*6 Changer: [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [11], a

ENGLISH
External input JVC compatible satellite (SIRIUS/XM) tuner,
[28], an Apple iPod, or a JVC D. player, [32].
Ext In: To use any other external component than
the above, [34].
Beep On: [Initial]; Activates the key-touch tone.
Key-touch tone Off: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
Telephone*7 Muting1/Muting2: Select either one which mutes the
AUDIO

Telephone muting sounds while using a cellular phone.


Off: [Initial]; Cancels.
• If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as
the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
Amp Gain You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Amplifier gain High PWR: [Initial]; Volume 00 – Volume 50
control Low PWR: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the
maximum power of the speaker is less than
50 W to prevent them from being damaged.)
Off*7: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Color Sel [Initial: All Source]; You can select your favorite display color
Color selection for each source (or for all sources), [25].
Color Set You can create your own colors, and select them for the
display color, [26].
COLOR

Day Color: User color during the day time*4.


NightColor: User color during the night time*4.
Red +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Green +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Blue +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
*3 Adjustable only when “Dimmer” is set to “Time Set.”
*4 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.
*5 Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected.
*6 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—TUNER, CD, USB, or LINE IN (only
for KD-AR870).
*7 Only for KD-AR870.

21

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 21 9/12/05 9:51:49 am


• To download the file(s), see the following.
Graphic displays • To delete the file(s), see pages 23 and 24.
• To activate the file(s), see page 25.
ENGLISH

Before starting the following procedure,


prepare a CD-R including still images (pictures)
and animations (movies).
• With Image Converter (Ver 3.0) included in IMPORTANT:
the supplied CD-ROM, you can create and • Refer also to Image Converter PDF files
download your own images and animations. included in the “Manual” folder on the
(Samples are included in the CD-ROM.) supplied CD-ROM.
These images/animation will be shown during • Still images (pictures) and animations
playing a source. (movie) should have the following
• You can store “LARGE” or “SMALL” pictures extension code in their file names:
and movies. – jtl: for large size still images
Picture: 30 still images each – jtm: for small size still images
Movie: 60 frames each – jta: for large size animations
– jtb: for small size animations
Basic procedure – jtw: for Image Link (see pages 13 and 19)
• Before you download or delete the files,
• When appears on the display, you can observe the following:
move back to the previous display by pressing – Do not download a file while driving.
number button 3. – Do not turn off the ignition key of the car
• When / appears on the display, while downloading or deleting a file.*
you can move to the other lists by pressing – Do not detach the control panel while
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly. downloading or deleting a file.*
– Do not attach or detach a USB memory
1 Insert a CD-R or the supplied while downloading a file.*
CD-ROM. * If you do so, the file download or deletion
will not be done correctly.

2 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 18.


Downloading pictures or an animation
• In step 2, select “MOVIE.”
• In step 3, select “Pict.” • It takes a long time to download an
animation. For details, see page 37.
• To activate the downloaded files, see page 25.
3 Select an item.

1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on left column.


• In step 3, select “Download.”

4 Select a picture size.

or

The display goes to the PICT menu.

22

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 22 20/12/05 3:51:11 pm


2 8 • To download more pictures from
the same folder, repeat steps 5 to 7.

ENGLISH
• To download more pictures from
another folder, press number button
3( ). Then, repeat steps 3 to 7.

9 Exit from the setting.

“File Check” appears and then the Folder


List appears on the display.
Deleting the files
Deleting the stored animation
3 Select a folder. 1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 22.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

4 Display the File List.

5 Select a file.
EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
step 4 on page 22

3 Delete the animation.


6 Confirm the selection.

EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected 4 Exit from the setting.

7 Download the file.

23

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 23 9/12/05 10:49:36 am


Deleting the stored pictures 4 Exit from the setting.
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 22.
ENGLISH

• In step 3, select “Delete.”

2 Deleting all the stored files


1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 22.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

The File List appears on the display.

3 • To delete one of the stored pictures


1 Use 5 / ∞ to select a file. Then, press
number button 1 ( ) to confirm EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
the selection. step 4 on page 22

3 Delete all the stored files.


EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete the selected file.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to delete more
pictures. 4 Exit from the setting.

• To delete all the stored pictures


1 Press number button 2 ( ).

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in step 4 on page


22
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete all the stored pictures.

24

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 24 9/12/05 10:49:42 am


Activating the downloaded files
Setting the time for dimmer
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 22.

ENGLISH
• When appears on the display, you can
• In step 3, select “Set.”
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
2 Select the display type.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 18.
• In step 2, select “DISPLAY.”
• In step 3, select “Dimmer.”

2 Select “Time Set.”

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in


step 4 on page 22 and “Movie”
is selected

Movie Your edited animation stored


in “Movie” is activated. \ Go 3 Adjust the dimmer time.
to step 3. 1 Turn the control dial to set the dimmer
Picture One of your edited still images time.
stored in “Picture” is activated. 2 Press ¢ to select “To.” Then, turn
\ Go to step 3. the control dial to set the dimmer end
Slideshow All stored still images are time.
activated and shown in
sequence (UserSlide). 4 Exit from the setting.
• If no still image is stored,
beeps sound.

3 Select a file.*

Changing the display color


You can select your favorite display color for
each source (or all sources).
The unit returns to the playback display.
• When appears on the display, you can
• To display the activated files, see page 8. move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
* If no still image or no animation is stored, you
can only select “Default.”

Continued on next page...


25

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 25 9/12/05 10:49:44 am


Setting the display color 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the color
for each source (except when selecting
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 18.
ENGLISH

“All Source” in step 3).


• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
• In step 3, select “Color Sel.”
6 Exit from the setting.
2

Creating your own color—User Color


3 Select a source. You can create your own colors—“Day Color”
or “NightColor.”

1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 18.


• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
All Source*1 O CD O Changer (or • In step 3, select “Color Set.”
Ext In*2) O LINE IN*3O USB*4 O FM
O AM O Sirius*4/XM*4 O Ipod*4/
D.PLAYER*4 O (back to the beginning)
2 Select “Day Color” or “NightColor.”

*1 When you select “All Source,” you can use


the same color for all the sources.
*2 Depends on the “Ext Input” setting, see
page 21.
*3 Only for KD-AR870.
*4 Displayed only when the target
component is connected.

4 Select a color.

3 Select a primary color.

Every*4 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O Leaves


O Grass O Apple O Rose O Amber
O Honey O Violet O Grape O Pale O
User*5 O (back to the beginning)
4 Adjust the level (+00 to +11) of the
*4 The color changes every 2 seconds. selected primary color.
*5 The user-edited colors—“Day Color” and
“NightColor” will be applied (see right
column for details).

26

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 26 16/12/05 12:00:40 pm


5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other 2 Display the TITLE input screen.
primary colors.

ENGLISH
6 Exit from the setting.

3 Assign a title.
1 Press number button 4 ( )
Title assignment repeatedly to select a character set.

You can assign titles to station frequencies, CDs


(both in the unit and the CD changer), and
external components (Ext In).

Maximum number of
Sources
characters
2 Turn the control dial to select a
FM/AM tuner Up to 10 characters (up to 30 character.
station frequencies including • For available characters, see page 38.
both FM and AM)
3 Use 4/¢ to move to the next
CDs/CD-CH*1 Up to 32 characters (up to (or previous) character position.
30 discs)
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you finish
External Up to 8 characters entering the title.
components
(“EXT IN” or
“LINE IN”*2) 4 Store the title.

*1 You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or


MP3/WMA/USB.
*2 Only for KD-AR870.

• When appears on the display, you can


move back to the previous display by pressing To erase the entire title
number button 3.
In step 3 above...

1 Select the sources.


• For FM/AM tuner: Tune into a station.
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external components: Select “EXT IN”
(see page 21) or “LINE IN.”

27

EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 27 5/12/05 4:53:45 pm


GCI (Global Control Information) update:
Satellite radio operations • If channels are updated after subscription,
updating starts automatically.
ENGLISH

This unit is satellite (SAT) Radio Ready The following appears and no sound can be
—compatible with both SIRIUS Satellite radio heard.
and XM Satellite radio. – For SIRIUS Satellite radio: “Channels
Updating XX%* Completed”
Before operating your satellite radio: – For XM Satellite radio: “UPDATING”
• For connection, see Installation/Connection • Update takes a few minutes to complete.
Manual (separate volume). • During update, you cannot operate your
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied with satellite radio.
your SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite
radio. * Changes every 20% of update is completion,
(ex. 20%, 40%, 60%).
• “SIRIUS ” and the SIRIUS dog logo are
registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Activate your SIRIUS subscription after
Inc. connection:
• XM and its corresponding logos are registered
1
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
• “SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all
related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS
Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio,
Inc.
2

Listening to the satellite radio


Connect either one of the following (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of this unit. JVC DLP starts updating all the SIRIUS
• JVC SIRIUS radio DLP—Down Link channels.
Processor, for listening to the SIRIUS Satellite
radio. Once completed, JVC DLP tunes in to the
• XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box—Using a preset channel, CH184.
JVC Smart Digital Adapter (XMDJVC100:
not supplied), for listening to the XM Satellite 3 Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 20.
radio.
4 Contact SIRIUS on the internet at
<http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to
activate your subscription, or you can
call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-
SIRIUS (7474).
“Subscription Updated Press Any Key to
Continue” appears on the display once
subscription has been completed.

28

EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 28 5/12/05 4:54:01 pm


Activate your XM subscription after 2
connection:

ENGLISH
• Only channel 0, 1, and 247 are available
before activation.

Signal strength bar increases as the receiving signal


improves. If no signal is received, no bars are displayed.

2 3 Select a category.

XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box starts


updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1” You can tune in to all the channels of every
is tuned in automatically. category by selecting “ALL.”
Selecting a particular category (SPORTS,
3 Check your XM Satellite radio ENTERTAINMENT, etc.) allows you to
ID labelled on the casing of the enjoy only the channels from the selected
XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box, or category.
tune in to “Channel 0” (see page 30).
• Holding either of the buttons can display
4 Contact XM Satellite radio on the category list (see page 31).
the internet at <http://xmradio.
comactivation/> to activate your 4 Select a channel for listening.
subscription, or you can call 1-800-
XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
Once completed, the unit tunes in to one
of the available channels (Channel 4 or
higher). • Holding either of the buttons changes the
channel rapidly.

• When changing the category or channel,


Listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio invalid and unsubscribed channels are
skipped.
1

Listening to the XM Satellite radio


1

Continued on next page...


29

EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 29 5/12/05 4:54:04 pm


2 If no operation is done for about 15
seconds, Category Search is canceled
( goes off).
ENGLISH

• While searching, invalid and


3 Select a channel for listening. unsubscribed channels are skipped.

Checking the XM Satellite radio ID


• Holding either of the buttons changes the While selecting “XM1,” “XM2,” or
channel rapidly. “XM3,” select “Channel 0.”

Searching for category/channel


You can search for programs by category
(Category Search) or channel number (Channel The display shows “RADIO ID ” and the 8-digit
Search). (alphanumeric) ID number.
• In Category Search, you can tune in to the
channels of the selected category. Category To cancel the ID number display, select any
Search begins from the currently selected channel other than “Channel 0.”
channel. The selected channel number flashes
on the display.
• In Channel Search, you can tune in to
all channels (including non-categorised Storing stations in memory
channels).
You can preset six stations for each band.
1 Select a category (Category Search). • When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
• For Channel Search, skip • When / appears on the display,
this step. you can move to the other lists by pressing
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly.
appears on the display.
Ex.: Storing a SIRIUS channel into preset
number 4 of the SR1 band.
2 Select a channel for listening.
1 Tune in to a channel you want to
listen to.
• By holding BAND button, the Preset
Channel List will appear (go to step 5 on
page 31).
EX.: When “Country” is selected for the Category Search

30

EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 30 9/12/05 10:04:20 am


2
Selecting a category/channel on
the list

ENGLISH
3 Select “List.” • When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
• When / appears on the display,
you can move to the other lists by pressing
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly.
4 Select “Preset.”
Ex.: When listening to the SIRIUS Satellite
radio.
1 • To select a category
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on left column.
• In step 4, select “Category.”

5 Select a preset number you want to The first channel of the selected category
store into. is tuned in.
• Holding 5 / ∞ can also show the
Category List while listening to a
channel.
2 Select a category.

6 Store the channel.

• To Select a channel
Listening to a user channel 1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on left culumn.
• In step 4, select “Channel.”
1 Display the Preset Channel list, then
select the preset number you want to
listen to.

2 Change to the selected channel.

Continued on next page...


31

EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 31 12/29/05 8:40:28 AM


2 Select a channel. • For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied
ENGLISH

with the interface adapter.

Caution:
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.
2 Change to the selected item.
Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external
input setting (see page 21).

To change the display information while ~


listening to a channel

Ÿ
Category name and channel name = Artist/
composer* name and song/program name
= Small graphic screen = Large graphic
screen = Audio level meter = (back to the
Playback starts automatically from where
beginning)
it has been paused (for iPod) or stopped
(for D. player) previously.
* Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.
! Adjust the volume.

iPod®/D. player operations


This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod
or a JVC D. player from the control panel. ⁄ Adjust the sound mode as you want.
(See pages 16 – 18.)
Before operating your iPod or D. player: • Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
Connect either one of the following (separately D. player is deactivated.
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of this unit.
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for
controlling an iPod.
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for
controlling a D. player.

32

EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 32 5/12/05 4:54:09 pm


To pause (only for iPod) or stop (only for 3 Confirm the selection.
D. player) playback

ENGLISH
To move back to the previous
menu, press 5.

• To resume playback, press it again. • If a track is selected, playback starts


automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you
To fast-forward or reverse the track
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3
until the desired track is played.
• Holding 4/¢ can skips 10
items at a time.

To go to the next or previous tracks


Selecting the playback modes
1

2 Select your desired playback mode.


Selecting a track from the menu
7 Repeat play
1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 4/¢ buttons work as


the menu selecting buttons.*
Mode Plays repeatedly
2 Select the desired menu. One: Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode = One” for the D. player
[ ].
All: Functions the same as “Repeat
For iPod: All” of the iPod or “Repeat
Playlists O Artists O Albums O Songs Mode = All” for the D. player
O Genres O Composers O (back to the [ ].
beginning) Off: Cancels.

For D. player:
Playlist O Artist O Album O Genre O
Track O (back to the beginning)

* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:


– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.
Continued on next page...
33

EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 33 12/12/05 2:53:02 pm


7 Random play
~ For KD-AR870
ENGLISH

• LINE IN: For selecting the external


Mode Plays at random component connected to the LINE IN
plugs.
Song: Functions the same as “Shuffle
• EXIT IN: For selecting the external
Songs” of the iPod [ ] or
component connected to the CD
“Random Play = On” of the
changer jack.
D. player [ ].
Album*: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod [ ]. For KD-G820
Off: Cancels.
* For iPod: Only if you select “All Albums”
in “Albums” of the main
“MENU.”
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 21
• You can also cancel the playback mode by and select the external input (“Ext In”).
pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

Ÿ Turn on the connected component


and start playing the source.
Other external component
operations ! Adjust the volume.

For KD-AR870:
You can connect an external component to the
LINE IN plugs on the rear.

For KD-AR870/KD-G820:
You can connect an external component to
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
pages 16 – 18.)
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Before operating the external component, select
the external input correctly (see page 21).
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).

• For listening to the USB memory, see page 12.


• For listening to an iPod or a D. player, see
pages 32 – 34.

34

EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 34 12/12/05 2:53:06 pm


• If you change the source, playback also stops.
More about this unit Next time you select the same playback source
again, playback starts from where it has been

ENGLISH
stopped previously.
Basic operations
Turning on the power Inserting a disc
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also • When a disc is inserted upside down, “Please
turn on the power. If the source is ready, Eject” appears on the display. Press 0 to eject
playback also starts. the disc.
• Do not insert 8 cm (3-3/16") discs (single CD)
Turning off the power and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.)
• If you turn off the power while listening to a into the loading slot.
disc, disc play will start from where playback
has been stopped previously, next time you Playing a disc
turn on the power. • While playing an audio CD: If a title has been
– For MP3/WMA disc: Disc play will start assigned to the audio CD (see page 27), it will
from the first track of the current folder if be shown on the display.
a <jtw> file is included and Image Link is • While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3
activated (see page 19). or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent
sounds.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• During SSM search... • Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
– All previously stored stations are erased and • This unit can play back only files of the same
stations are stored newly. type which are first detected if a disc includes
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency). WMA files.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in • This unit can play back multi-session discs;
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in. however, unclosed sessions will be skipped
• When storing a station manually, the while playing.
previously preset station is erased when a new • Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played
station is stored in the same preset number. back on this unit because of their disc
characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
Disc operations – Moisture condensation occurs on the lens
Caution for DualDisc playback inside the unit.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does – The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital – CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non- written with “Packet Write” method.
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may – There are improper recording conditions
not be recommended. (missing data, etc.) or media conditions
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
General • CD-RWs may require a longer readout time
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than
• This unit has been designed to reproduce that of regular CDs.
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),
MP3 and WMA formats.
Continued on next page...
35

EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 35 21/12/05 4:45:56 pm


• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs: • This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
seal stuck to the surface. • This unit cannot play back the following files:
ENGLISH

– Discs on which labels can be directly – MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
printed by an ink jet printer. MP3 PRO format.
Using these discs under high temperatures or – MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate
high humidities may cause malfunctions or format.
damage to the unit. – MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless,
Playing an MP3/WMA disc professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
Windows Media® Audio.
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
• This unit can show the names of albums,
ATRAC3, etc.
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,
• The search function works but search speed is
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA
not constant.
files.
• This unit can display only one-byte
characters. No other characters can be Playing MP3/WMA track from a USB memory
correctly displayed. • While playing from a USB memory, the
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files playback order may differ from other players.
meeting the conditions below: • This unit may be unable to play back some
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps USB memories or some files due to their
– Sampling frequency: characteristics or recording conditions.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) • Depending on the shape of the USB memories
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2) and connection ports, some USB memories
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, may not be attached properly or the
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name connection might be loose.
• The maximum number of characters for file/ • It is not recommended to use a USB memory
folder names vary among the disc format used wider than 20 mm (13/16") as it will block you
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or from pressing the 0 button.
<.wma>). • If the connected USB memory does not have
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters the correct files, “No Files” appears and the
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters unit returns to the previous source.
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters • This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72) • This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
characters meeting the conditions below:
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum – Bit rate:
number of characters for file/folder names in MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)
case the total number of files and folders is 8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)
313 or more. WMA: 5 kbps — 320 kbps
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR
(variable bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy
in elapsed time display, and do not show
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after
performing the search function, this
difference becomes noticeable.

36

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 36 17/12/05 3:23:45 pm


– Sampling frequency: Graphic display
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2) General

ENGLISH
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz • You can display two sizes of pictures and
(MPEG-2.5) animations.
WMA: 8 kHz — 48 kHz – LARGE: <jtl> for still pictures and <jta> for
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in the animations;
VBR (variable bit rate). The image is displayed with the
• The maximum number of characters for dimension of the screen.
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 – SMALL: <jtm> for still pictures and <jtb>
characters for MP3/WMA tag information. for animations;
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files The image is displayed like a
and 250 folders (999 files per folder). CD jacket (on the left side of the
display).
Image Link • Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
longer time to show it on the display.
• Image Link will not work in the following
cases:
– If no <jtw> file is included in an MP3/ Downloading (or deleting) files
WMA folder. • You can download a file only while selecting
– If Intro play is activated. “CD” for the playback source; on the other
– If the source is changed to another from hand, you can delete a file while selecting any
“CD.” source.
• If more than one <jtw> file are included in a • After finishing the procedure to download a
folder, a file with the youngest file number is file, playback starts from the beginning.
used for Image Link. • If you have already downloaded an animation,
downloading a new animation deletes the
Ejecting a disc previously stored animation.
• It takes a long time to download an
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
animation.
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted
– About 3 to 4 seconds for a still image (one
again into the loading slot to protect it from
frame).
dust. (Disc will not be played this time.)
– About 1 to 2 minutes for an animation of 30
frames.
Sound adjustment – About 3 minutes for an animation of 60
General frames.
• If you try to operate the downloading
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the
procedure from a disc without any <jtl>,
fader level to the center (“00”).
<jtm>, <jta>, and <jtb> files, beeps sound.
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a
• If you try to store more than 30 images
subwoofer is connected.
for each size “LARGE” and “SMALL,”
• You cannot change the input level—
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If you try to
downloading. Delete unwanted files before
adjust it for FM, “Fix” will appear.
downloading.
• If the total frame number of an animation
downloaded exceeds 60, the frames exceeding
that number are ignored.

Continued on next page...


37

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 37 21/12/05 4:42:05 pm


General settings—PSM Satellite radio operations
• “Auto” setting for “Dimmer” may not work • You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio
ENGLISH

correctly on some vehicles, particularly on PnP (Plug and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS
those having a control dial for dimming. In radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied) to
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any the CD changer jack on the rear.
other than “Auto.” By turning on/off the power of the unit, you
• If “LCD Type” is set to “Auto,” the display can turn on/off the JVC PnP. However, you
pattern will change to the “Positive” or cannot control it from this unit.
“Negative” pattern depending on the • To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or
“Dimmer” setting. to sign up, visit «http://www.sirius.com».
• Changing the “Amp Gain” setting from • For the latest channel listings and
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” when the level programming information, or to sign up for
is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit XM Satellite radio, visit «http://www.xmradio.
automatically changes the volume level to com».
“Volume 30.”
iPod or D. player operations
Title assignment • When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 D. player is charged through this unit.
station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name • While the iPod or D. player is connected, all
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before operations from the iPod or D. player are
assignment. disabled. Perform all operations from this
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can unit.
also be shown if you play back the disc from • The text information may not be displayed
the unit and vice versa. correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters
Available characters on the display cannot be shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of
Capital letters
communication between the iPod or
D. player and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
Small letters
also page 19). This unit can display up to 40
characters.

Notice:
Numbers and symbols
When operating an iPod or D. player,
some operations may not be performed
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the
following JVC web site:
For iPod users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>
For D. player users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd500/index.html>

38

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 38 9/12/05 9:49:28 am


To keep discs clean
Maintenance A dirty disc may not play correctly.

ENGLISH
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it
How to clean the connectors with a soft cloth in a straight line
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the from center to edge.
connectors. • Do not use any solvent (for example,
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to
damage the connectors. To play new discs
New discs may have some rough
spots around the inner and outer
edges. If such a disc is used, this
unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges
Connector with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the Do not use the following discs:
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
Warped disc
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until Sticker Sticker residue
the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs Stick-on label


When removing a disc from Center holder
its case, press down the center
holder of the case and lift the disc
out, holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert
the disc around the center holder (with the
printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after
use.

39

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 39 5/12/05 6:04:35 pm


Troubleshooting
ENGLISH

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service
center.

Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
speakers. • Check the cords and connections.
General

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• “Connect Error” appears on the Remove the control panel, wipe the connector,
display. then attach it again (see page 2).
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually.
FM/AM

work.
• Static noise while listening to the Connect the antenna firmly.
radio.
• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
back. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot which you used for recording.
be skipped.
Disc playback

• Disc can be neither played back nor • Unlock the disc (see page 15).
ejected. • Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
Disc,” “Loading Error,” or “Eject
Error” flashes).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in
MP3/WMA playback

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,


Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
the file names.
• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

40

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 40 9/12/05 10:04:59 am


Symptoms Remedies/Causes

ENGLISH
• A longer readout time is required Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
(“File Check” keeps flashing on the
display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are
you have intended them to play. recorded.
MP3/WMA playback

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs while playing. This is
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• “Not Support” appears on the display Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate
and track skips. format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA
track.
• “NO MUSIC” appears on the display. Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 38).
• Noise is generated. The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
USB memory playback

tracks.)
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the • Readout time varies depending on the USB
display. memory.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Attach a USB memory that contains tracks
encoded in an appropriate format.
• “Not Support” appears on the display The track is unplayable.
and track skips.

Continued on next page...


41

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 41 5/12/05 6:04:37 pm


Symptoms Remedies/Causes
ENGLISH

• “Read Failed” appears on the display, • The attached USB memory may be
then returns to the previous source. malfunctioning, or may not have been
formatted correctly.
The files included in the USB memory are
corrupted.
USB memory playback

• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory


repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the
display.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 38).
• While playing a track, sound is MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied
sometimes interrupted. into the USB memory.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB
memory, and try again.
• “No Disc” appears on the display. Insert a disc into the magazine.
• “No Magazine” appears on the Insert the magazine.
display.
CD changer

• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly
and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Press the reset button of the CD changer.
the display.
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• Download does not seem to finish. It takes quite a long time to download an
animation with many frames (see page 37).
• Animation does not move. Wait until the operating temperature resumes.
PICT—PSM

• The display graphic function does


not work correctly.
• You cannot select an image or Select an image only after downloading the
animation for “Set” in “Pict.” appropriate files in memory.
(“Default” cannot be changed for
“Movie” and “Picture, ” or beeps
sound for “Slideshow.”)

42

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 42 5/12/05 6:04:38 pm


Symptoms Remedies/Causes

ENGLISH
• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO Starts subscribing SIRIUS Satellite radio (see page
SUBSCRIBE” scrolls on the display 28).
while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite
radio.
• No sound can be heard. The unit is updating the channel information and
“Channel Updating XX%* it takes a few minutes to complete.
Completed” appears on the display.
• Either “No Signal” or “NO SIGNAL” Move to an area where signals are stronger.
appears on the display.
• Either “No Antenna” or “CHECK Connect the antenna firmly.
ANTENNA” appears on the display.
• “Invalid Channel” appears on the No broadcast on the selected channel.
display for about 5 seconds, then Select another channel or continue listening to
returns to the previous display while the previous channel.
listening to the SIRIUS Satellite
radio.
Satellite radio

• “No Name” appears or scrolls on the No text information for the selected channel.
display while listening to the SIRIUS
Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display while
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display for Selected channel is no longer available or is
about 2 seconds, then returns to the unauthorized.
previous channel while listening to Select another channel or continue listening to
the XM Satellite radio. the previous channel.
• “OFF AIR” appears on the display Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.
while listening to the XM Satellite
radio.
• “LOADING” appears on the display Select another channel or continue listening to
while listening to the XM Satellite the previous channel.
radio.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. The unit is loading the channel information
and audio. Text information are temporarily
unavailable.
• Satellite radio does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the satellite radio
correctly and reset this unit.
* Changes every 20% of update is completion, (ex. 20%, 40%, 60%).

Continued on next page...


43

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 43 9/12/05 9:49:32 am


Symptoms Remedies/Causes
ENGLISH

• The iPod or D. player does not turn • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
on or does not work. • Update the firmware version.
• Change the battery.
• Buttons do not work as intended. The functions of the buttons have been changed.
Press MODE before performing the operation.
• The sound is distorted. Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the
iPod/D. player.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display. Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Playback stops. The headphones are disconnected during
iPod/D. player playback

playback. Restart the playback operation using


the control panel (see pages 32 and 33).
• No sound can be heard when Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard. Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,
• “Error 01” appears on the display connect it again.
when connecting a D. player.
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK” No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or
appears on the display. D. player.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and
the display. iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Check the connection between the adapter and
this unit.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.
not work after disconnecting from
this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

44

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 44 20/12/05 3:57:43 pm


Specifications

ENGLISH
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION
Power Output: Type: Compact disc player
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical
4 Ω and ≤ 1% THD+N pickup (semiconductor laser)
Signal to Noise Ratio: Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)
Dynamic Range: 96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit
Tone Control Range: MP3 Decoding Format:
Low: ±12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz) MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Mid: ±12 dB (500 Hz, 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz) Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
High: ±12 dB (10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding
17.5 kHz) Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Line-In Level/Impedance: Playable USB memory:
KD-AR870: 1.5V/20kΩ load Format: FAT 12/16/32
Line-Out Level/Impedance: Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
KD-AR870: 5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale) Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA
KD-G820: 4.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale) GENERAL
Other Terminals: Power Requirement:
CD changer, LINE IN (for KD-AR870) Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
TUNER SECTION Grounding System: Negative ground
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Frequency Range:
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Dimensions (W × H × D):
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz
Installation Size (approx.):
or 200 kHz)
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(7-3/16" × 2-1/16" × 6")
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)
Panel Size (approx.):
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)
(7-7/16" × 2-5/16" × 7/16")
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Mass (approx.):
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)
1.4 kg (3.1 lbs) (excluding accessories)
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω) Design and specifications are subject to change
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: without notice.
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz telephone directory for the nearest car audio
Stereo Separation: 35 dB speciality shop.
[AM Tuner]
Sensitivity: 20 μV
Selectivity: 35 dB

45

EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 45 20/12/05 3:57:45 pm


Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Still having trouble??
USA ONLY

Call 1-800-252-5722
http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!

EN, SP, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0106DTSMDTJEIN

Rear_KD-AR870_820[J]1.indd 2 5/12/05 4:54:37 pm


KD-AR870/KD-G820
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual de instalación/conexión
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
GET0359-002A 0106DTSMDTJEIN
[J] EN, SP, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

ENGLISH ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS


This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous
dealers. adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
automóviles.

WARNINGS ADVERTENCIAS AVERTISSEMENTS


To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements
installing the unit. antes de instalar la unidad. électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after • Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis • Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de
installation. del automóvil después de la instalación. cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.

Notes: Notas: Remarques:


• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows • Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el • Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer. fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles. • Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with • Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une
an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est
50 W, change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from de 4 Ω a 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp Gain” pour éviter d’endommager
being damaged (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS). “Amp Gain” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 21 vos enceintes (voir page 21 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES). • Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont
with insulating tape. • Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it aislante. • Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire
when removing this unit. • El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.
de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.

Heat sink
Sumidero térmico
Dissipateur de chaleur

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la
connections: fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces: connexion des enceintes:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de • NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged. alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the producirse graves daños en la unidad. sérieusement endommagé.
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car. • ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del • AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.
automóvil.

Parts list for installation and connection Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión Liste des pièces pour l’installation et
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún raccordement
consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately. elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles. manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.

A/B C D
Hard case/Control panel Sleeve Trim plate
Estuche duro/Panel de control Cubierta Placa de guarnición
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande Manchon Plaque d’assemblage

E F G H
Power cord Washer (ø5) Lock nut (M5) Mounting bolt—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16")
Cordón de alimentación Arandela (ø5) Tuerca de seguridad (M5) Perno de montaje—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pulgada)
Cordon d’alimentation Rondelle (ø5) Ecrou d’arrêt (M5) Boulon de montage—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pouces)

I J K L M
Rubber cushion Handles Remote controller Battery CD-ROM (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
Cojín de goma Manijas Control remoto Pila CD-ROM (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
Amortisseur en caoutchouc Poignées Télécommade Pile CD-ROM (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)

Instal1-2_KDAR870G820[J]2.indd 1 9/12/05 12:00:37 pm


INSTALLATION INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL INSTALLATION (MONTAGE
(IN-DASH MOUNTING) TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS) DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits
your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits. instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.
by a qualified technician. • Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad, • Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le
hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado. faire installer par un technicien qualifié.

Do the required electrical connections.


Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.

*1 When you stand the unit,


be careful not to damage the
fuse on the rear.
*1 Al poner la unidad vertical,
tenga cuidado de no dañar
el fusible provisto en la parte
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
posterior.
sleeve firmly in place.
*1 Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil
à la verticale, faire attention
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para
de ne pas endommager le retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.
fusible situé sur l’arrière. Tordez les languettes appropriées pour
maintenir le manchon en place.

Removing the unit Extracción de la unidad Retrait de l’appareil


Before removing the unit, release the rear section. Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera. Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as


illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,
extráigalas de la manera indicada en la ilustración
para poder desmontar la unidad.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.

When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar
soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon
option In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall Stay (option) En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.
Tabique a prueba de incendios Soporte (opción) Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Cloison Hauban (en option)
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm *2 Not supplied for this unit.
(M5 × 3/8")*2 *2 No suministrado con esta unidad.
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm *2 Non fourni avec cet appareil.
Dashboard (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2 Bracket*2
Tablero de instrumentos Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm Ménsula*2
Tableau de bord (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2
Screw (option) Support*2
Tornillo (opción) Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2
Vis (en option) Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm
Pocket (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2
Compartimiento Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2
Poche Bracket*2
Ménsula*2
Support*2

Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer
screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Nota : Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚. Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚. (3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.

TROUBLESHOOTING LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES


• The fuse blows. • El fusible se quema. • Le fusible saute.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados? * Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• Power cannot be turned on. • No es posible conectar la alimentación. • L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Is the yellow lead connected? * ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado? * Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• No sound from the speakers. • No sale sonido de los altavoces. • Pas de son des enceintes.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? * ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Sound is distorted. • El sonido presenta distorsión. • Le son est déformé.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? * ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una * Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
masa común? à la masse?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using • Perturbación de ruido. • Interférence avec les sons.
shorter and thicker cords? * ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil * La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso? voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? • La unidad se calienta. • L’appareil devient chaud.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una * Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
• This unit does not work at all.
masa común? à la masse?
* Have you reset your unit?
• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto. • Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* ¿Reinicializó el receptor? * Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
2

Instal1-2_AR870G820[J]f.indd 2 12/28/05 12:01:15 PM


ENGLISH ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
A Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit. vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad. sérieusement l’appareil.
body may be different in color. Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order procedentes de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.
specified in the illustration below. en color. 1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre
2 Connect the antenna cord. 1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo. 2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
2 Conecte el cable de antena. 3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.
To subwoofer (see diagram )
LINE IN— only for KD-AR870 (see diagram ) Al subwoofer (véase diagrama )
sólo para KD-AR870 (véase diagrama ) Au caisson de grave (voir le diagramme )
seulement pour le KD-AR870 (voir le diagramme )
Antenna connector
Conector de antena
Connecteur d’antenne 15 A fuse
Fusible de 15 A
Fusible 15 A *1 Not supplied for this unit. Ignition switch
*1 No suministrado con esta unidad. Interruptor de encendido
Rear ground terminal
*1 Non fourni avec cet appareil. Interrupteur d’allumage
Terminal de tierra
posterior Black
Borne arrière de masse Negro
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Noir
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Line out (see diagram ) Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Salida de línea (véase diagrama )
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme )
Yellow*2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
Amarillo*2
To external components (see diagram ) the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Jaune*2 A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del
To external components (see diagram )
To external components (see diagram ) automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture
Red (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant) Fuse block
Rojo Bloque de fusibles
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block Porte-fusible
Rouge
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles
this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Blue with white stripe
turned on. Azul con rayas blancas To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)
*2 Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa Bleu avec bande blanche Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)
a de la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
contrario no se podrá conectar la alimentación.
(200 mA max.)
*2 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant Orange with white stripe
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut Naranja con rayas blancas
pas être mis sous tension. Orange avec bande blanche To car light control switch
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil
Brown À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
Marrón
Marrone To cellular phone system—only for KD-AR870
Al sistema de teléfono celular—sólo para KD-AR870
Al cellulare—seulement pour le KD-AR870

White with black stripe White Gray with black stripe Gray Green with black stripe Green Purple with black stripe Purple
Blanco con rayas negras Blanco Gris con rayas negras Gris Verde con rayas negras Verde Púrpura con rayas negras Púrpura
Blanc avec bande noire Blanc Gris avec bande noire Gris Vert avec bande noire Vert Violet avec bande noire Violet

Left speaker (front) Right speaker (front) Left speaker (rear) Right speaker (rear)
Altavoz izquierdo (delantero) Altavoz derecho (delantero) Altavoz izquierdo (trasero) Altavoz derecho (trasero)
Enceinte gauche (avant) Enceinte droit (avant) Enceinte gauche (arrière) Enceinte droit (arrière)

C Connecting other external components / Conexión de los componentes externos / Connexion des appareils extérieurs
JVC CD changer, SIRIUS Satellite radio, XM Satellite radio, Apple iPod®, or JVD D. player / Cambiador de CD de JVC, radio satelital SIRIUS, radio satelital XM,
iPod® de Apple o reproductor JVC D. / Changeur de CD JVC, radio satellite SIRIUS, radio satellite XM, iPod® Apple ou lecteur D. JVC
• Set “Changer” for external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “Changer” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 21 del MANUAL DE
INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez “Changer” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 21 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. Estos componentes se pueden conectar en serie, tal como se muestra Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur
• For listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio, connect a JVC DLP en la ilustración de abajo. l’illustration.
—Down Link Processor (separately purchased) to this unit. • Para escuchar la radio satelital SIRIUS, conecte un DLP (Down Link • Pour écouter la radio satellite SIRIUS, connectez un processeur DLP
• The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface Processor) de JVC (adquirido por separado) al receptor. JVC —Processeur de signaux satellite-terre (vendu séparément) à cet
adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for • Puede conectar el iPod*5 o el reproductor D. usando un adaptador appareil.
D. player). de interfaz (no suministrado)—KS-PD100 (para iPod) o KS-PD500 • Le iPod*5 ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un
(para el reproductor D.). adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou
KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Conexión 1 (conexión integrada) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)

Apple iPod (separately JVC D. player (separately


purchased) purchased)
Apple iPod (adquirido Reproductor D. JVC
or
JVC DLP JVC CD changer separadamente) (adquirido separadamente)
o
DLP JVC Cambiador de CD de JVC iPod Apple (vendu Lecteur D. JVC (vendu
ou
Processeur DLP JVC Changeur de CD JVC séparément) séparément)

• For listening to the XM Satellite radio, you can also connect XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box (separately purchased) through this unit using JVC Smart
Digital Adapter—XMDJVC100 (not supplied).
CD changer jack • Para escuchar la radio satelital XM, también puede conectar el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™ (adquirido por separado) al receptor mediante un
Jack para el cambiador de CD adaptador Smart Digital XMDJVC100 de JVC (no suministrado).
Prise du changeur CD • Pour écouter la radio satellite XM, vous pouvez aussi connecter le tuner universel XMDirect™ (vendu séparément) à cet appareil en utilisant l’adaptateur
numérique intelligent JVC—XMDJVC100 (non fourni). Antenna (supplied with XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box)
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect™)

To CD changer, KS-PD100, or KS-PD500 XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box


Al cambiador de CD, KS-PD100 o KS-PD500 Sintonizador universal XMDirect™
Au changeur de CD, KS-PD100 ou KS-PD500 Tuner universel XMDirect™

Instal3-4_AR870G820[J]f.indd 3 12/28/05 12:07:47 PM


B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Conexión de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos / Connexion
d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system. Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote de su automóvil. système autoradio.
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through • Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor • Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
this unit. remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the unidad. puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused. • Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al • Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les
– Only for KD-AR870: You can switch off the built-in amplifier amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil
and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to quedan sin usar. inutilisés.
get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the – Sólo para KD-AR870: Podrá desconectar el amplificador – Uniquement pour le KD-AR870: Vous pouvez mettre hors service
unit. See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS (separate volume). incorporado y enviar las señales de audio solamente al(los) l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer les signaux audio uniquement
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the amplificador(es) externo(s) para obtener sonidos nítidos y evitar sur un ou plusieurs amplificateurs extérieurs afin d’obtenir un
hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit. que se caliente el interior de la unidad. Consulte la página 21 del son clair et d’éviter tout échauffement interne de l’autoradio. Voir
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES (volumen separado). page 21 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume séparé).
down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the – El nivel de salida de línea de esta unidad permanece alto para que – Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est maintenu à un
best performance from this unit. corresponda con los sonidos de alta fidelidad reproducidos por niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi pour les sons
esta unidad. reproduits par cet appareil.
Cuando conecte un amplificador externo a esta unidad, Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à
disminuya el control de ganancia del amplificador externo para cet appareil, diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur
obtener un óptimo rendimiento de esta unidad. extérieur pour obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.
Remote lead
Cable remoto Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Fil d’alimentation à distance Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas) Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Rear speakers Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Altavoces posteriores blanche) Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Enceintes arrière

JVC Amplifier To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Amplificador de JVC Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere
JVC Amplificateur Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il
y en a une

JVC Amplifier
Front speakers Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplifier
Altavoces delanteros Front speakers JVC Amplificateur
Amplificador de JVC Subwoofer
Enceintes avant JVC Amplificateur Altavoces delanteros
Subwoofer
Enceintes avant
Caisson de grave

*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the
wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
*3 Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de fijar el cable). De lo
contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad. *4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*3 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la *4 Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)
peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement. *4 Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Conexión 2 (conexión alternativa) /Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)


CD changer jack / Jack para el cambiador de CD / Prise du changeur CD
Apple iPod (separately
purchased)
Apple iPod (adquirido JVC D. player (separately
separadamente) purchased)
iPod Apple (vendu or Reproductor D. JVC
JVC DLP or JVC CD changer o (adquirido separadamente)
o séparément)
DLP JVC Cambiador de CD de JVC ou Lecteur D. JVC (vendu
Processeur DLP JVC ou Changeur de CD JVC séparément)

Antenna (supplied with XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box) CAUTION / PRECAUCION / PRECAUTION:
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal Before connecting the external components,
XMDirect™) make sure that the unit is turned off.
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect™) Antes de conectar los componentes externos,
XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box asegúrese de que la unidad esté apagada.
Sintonizador universal XMDirect™ Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs,
Tuner universel XMDirect™ assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.

*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. *6 Connecting cord supplied with your JVC CD changer or DLP *7 Signal cord supplied with your Smart Digital Adapter
*5 iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros países. *6 Conexión del cable suministrado para su cambiador de CD o DLP JVC *7 Cable de señal suministrado con el adaptador Smart Digital
*5 iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans *6 Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre changeur CD ou processeur *7 Cordon de signal fourni avec votre adaptateur numérique
les autres pays. DLP JVC intelligent

*8 Audio signal cord supplied with your Smart Digital Adapter. Other external component / Otro componente externo / Autre appareil
*8 Cable de señal de audio suministrado con el adaptador Smart Digital
extérieur
*8 Cordon audio fourni avec votre adaptateur numérique intelligent

JVC PnP (Plug and Play) / PnP (Plug and Play) JVC / PnP (Plug and Play) JVC External component
Componente exterior
• Set “Ext In” for external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione Appareil extérieur
“Ext In” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 21 del MANUAL DE
INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez “Ext In” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 21 du External component
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.) Componente exterior
You can also connect JVC PnP through this unit using JVC SIRIUS radio adapter, KS-U100K (not CD changer jack Appareil extérieur
supplied). Jack para el cambiador de CD
• Turning on/off the unit can also turns on/off the JVC PnP. Prise du changeur CD 3.5 mm stereo mini plug
También podrá conectar la PnP JVC a través de este receptor utilizando el adaptador para radio SIRIUS Miniclavija estéreo de 3,5 mm
JVC, KS-U100K (no suministrado). Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm
• Al encender/apagar el receptor también se enciende/apaga la PnP JVC.
Vous pouvez aussi connecter le PnP JVC à cet autoradio en utilisant l’adaptateur de radio SIRIUS JVC KS- *9 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
U100K (non fourni). *9 Adaptador de entrada de línea KS-U57 (no suministrado con esta unidad)
• Mettre sous/hors tension l’autoradio peut aussi mettre sous/hors tension le PnP JVC. *9 Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet appareil)

To headphones jack
*10 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
Stereo mini plug
Al jack para auriculares *10 Adaptador de entrada AUX KS-U58 (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Miniclavija estéreo *10 Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
À la prise du casque d’écoute
Fiche stéré mini

Only for KD-AR870/ sólo para KD-AR870/ seulement pour le KD-AR870/

CD power plug To DC IN jack External component


Clavija de alimentación de CC Al jack DC IN Componente exterior
CD changer jack
Fiche d’alimentation CC À la prise DC IN
Jack para el cambiador de CD Appareil extérieur
Prise du changeur CD
4

Instal3-4_AR870G820[J]f.indd 4 12/28/05 12:07:54 PM


CD RECEIVER

KD-G824

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0361-001A
[UI]

Cover_KD-G824[UI]1.indd 2 12/23/05 9:45:43 AM


Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS


1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit How to use the MODE/SEL button


If you use MODE or SEL (select), the display
and some controls (such as the number buttons,
4/¢ buttons, 5/∞ buttons, and the
control dial) enter the corresponding control
mode.
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after
pressing MODE, to operate the FM tuner.
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

“Please Eject” appears on the display.

Works as time countdown indicator.

• If this does not work, reset your unit. To use these controls for original functions
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects. again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
of these buttons until the control is cleared.
• Pressing MODE again also restores original
functions. However, pressing SEL makes the
unit enters a different mode.
Caution:
If the temperature inside the car is below 0°C, the movement of animation and text scroll will be
halted on the display to prevent the display from being blurred. appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, and the operating temperature is resumed, these functions will
start working again.
2

EN02-05KD-G824[UI]1.indd 2 12/23/05 9:46:31 AM


How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with
CONTENTS
the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in Control panel ................................... 4
“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............. 5
Getting started ................................. 6
Press briefly. Basic operations ................................................... 6
Radio operations .............................. 7
Press repeatedly. Disc/USB memory operations............. 9
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 9
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................ 9
Press either Playing a USB memory ......................................... 10
one.
Sound adjustments ........................... 14
Press and hold until your General settings — PSM ................... 16
desired response begins. Title assignment............................... 24
Press and hold both
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24
buttons at the same time. Other external component
operations .................................... 26
The following marks are used to indicate... More about this unit ......................... 27
: Built-in CD player operations.
Maintenance .................................... 31
: External CD changer operations. Troubleshooting ............................... 32
: External USB memory operations. Specifications ................................... 35

Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, For safety...
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as
involved in a traffic accident.
this will block outside sounds, making driving
dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any
Caution on volume setting: complicated operations.
Discs produce very little noise compared
with other sources. Lower the volume Temperature inside the car...
before playing a disc to avoid damaging If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
the speakers by the sudden increase of the or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
output level. the car becomes normal before operating the
unit.

EN02-05KD-G824[UI]1.indd 3 12/23/05 9:46:37 AM


Control panel
Parts identification

1 BAND button 7 EQ (equalizer) button


2 • Control dial 8 0 (eject) button
• (standby/on attenuator) button 9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
3 DISP (display) button p SRC (source) button
4 Remote sensor q (control panel release) button
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to w SEL (select) button
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial e MODE button
lighting). r Number buttons
5 Display window t 4/¢ buttons
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

How to detach/attach the control panel


Detaching... Attaching...

Lever CAUTION:
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while
the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back
into lock position before attaching the panel.

EN02-05KD-G824[UI]1.indd 4 12/23/05 9:46:38 AM


Remote controller — RM-RK50
Installing the lithium coin battery Main elements and features
(CR2025)

Aim the remote controller directly at the 1 (standby/on/attenuator) button


remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is • Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
no obstacle in between. attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning: 2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Do not install any battery other than • Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may • Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
explode. • Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
• Store the battery in a place where children USB.
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident. • While playing an MP3 disc on an
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, MP3-compatible CD changer:
cracking, or starting a fire: – Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, – Changes the folder if pressed and held.
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire. • While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
– Do not leave the battery with other JVC D. player:
metallic materials. – Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or D ∞.
similar tools. – Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
when throwing away or saving it. selecting buttons.)*
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
Caution: 4 SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (i-EQ: intelligent
equalizer).

* 5 U: Returns to the previous menu.


D ∞: Confirms the selection.

Continued on next page...


5

EN02-05KD-G824[UI]1.indd 5 12/23/05 9:46:39 AM


5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons pages 14 – 16.)
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held. To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player To restore the sound, press it
(in menu selecting mode): again.
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.) To turn off the power
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and
held.

Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
~ Turn on the power. 16 – 18.
1

Ÿ 2-1 Canceling the display


demonstrations
Turn the control dial to set “Demo/Link”
to “Off.”

2-2 Setting the clock


1 Press number button 4 ( ).
* You cannot select these sources if they “Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then,
are not ready or not connected. turn the control dial to adjust the
hour.
! For FM/AM tuner 2 Press ¢ to select “Clock Min”
(minute). Then, turn the control
dial to adjust the minute.
3 Press ¢ to select “24H/12H.”
⁄ Adjust the volume.
Then, turn the control dial to select
“12Hours” or “24Hours,” time
display mode.

3 Exit from the setting.

EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 6 12/23/05 9:47:02 AM


To check the current clock time when the
power is turned off Radio operations
~
Changing the display pattern
Ÿ
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
! Start searching for a station.

Source operation display


When a station is received, searching
stops.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast
with sufficient signal strength,
lights up on the display.
“SMALL” (CD jacket image) graphic*1 is displayed.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
*2
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed. 1

2 Select a desired station frequency.


Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 17).

Goes back to the initial display pattern.

*1 You can use your edited file for graphic screen When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
(see pages 19 – 22). receive
Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
1
a longer time to show it on the display.
*2 The information bar will disappear if no
operation is performed for five seconds.

Continued on next page...


7

EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 7 12/23/05 9:47:08 AM


2 Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.

Using the number buttons


3 Exit from the setting. 1

lights up on the display.


Reception improves, but stereo effect will 2
be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, select “Mono Off”
in step 2. goes off.

3
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting— Using the Preset Station List


SSM (Strong-station Sequential • When appears on the display, you can
Memory) move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you
want to store into.
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
• By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List
will appear (go to step 4 on page 9).
2
2

3 Select “SSM.”

3 Display the Preset Station List.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are


searched and stored automatically in the FM
band.

EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 8 12/23/05 9:47:09 AM


4 Select the preset number you want to
store into. Disc/USB memory
operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
• You can move to the lists of the other FM change the source or eject the disc.
bands by pressing number button 5
( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly.

5 Store the station.

To stop playback and eject the disc

Listening to a preset station


Using the number buttons
1 Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played
repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you
want to listen to. ~

or
* If you have changed the external input
setting to “Ext In” (see page 18), you
cannot select the CD changer.

Using the Preset Station List Ÿ Select a disc.


For disc number from 01 – 06:
1 Display the Preset Station List, then
select the preset station you want to
listen to.

2 Change to the selected station. For disc number from 07 – 12:

EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 9 12/23/05 9:47:11 AM


Playing a USB memory Track and folder information (CD/CD Text/
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a MP3/WMA/USB)
USB memory.
Once you insert a disc or attach a USB
All tracks in the USB memory will be played
memory, the total track number/total
repeatedly until you change the source.
playing time (for CD/CD Text) and total
• Removing the USB memory will also stop
folder number/total track number (for MP3/
playback.
WMA/USB) appears, then the following
~ information appears...

Ex.: When “CD-CH” is selected as the source

Current folder number*1


Current disc number*2 Elapsed playing time
File type*1*3 Current track number

Ÿ USB input terminal


• For the audio CD or CD Text:
Disc name*4 and Track name*5
• For the MP3/WMA/USB:
Folder name and File name, or
Album/performer*6 and Track name*6

USB memory • When playing CD changer, the total


numbers will not appear.
If a USB memory has been attached...
*1 Displayed only when an MP3/WMA
track is played back.
*2 Displayed only when “CD-CH” is selected
as the source.
*3 Either MP3 or WMA indicator lights up
depending on the detected file.
Playback starts from where it has been stopped
*4 Appears only for CD Texts and CDs if
previously.
it has been recorded or assigned. (“No
• If a different USB memory is currently
Name” appears if no name is recorded or
attached, playback starts from the beginning.
assigned.)
*5 Appears only for CD Texts. (“No Name”
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it
appears if no name is recorded.)
out from the unit.
*6 Appears only when “Tag” is set to “On”
(see page 18).
Cautions:
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might
hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all the important data has been
backed up to avoid losing the data.

10

EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 10 12/23/05 9:47:12 AM


About MP3 and WMA tracks To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and MP3/WMA/USB)
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

When an MP3/WMA folder in an MP3/


WMA disc includes an image <jtw> file
edited by Image Converter (Ver 3.0)—
supplied in the CD-ROM, you can show the For the main unit:
image on the display while the tracks in the • Holding either of the buttons can display the
folder are played back—Image Link. (See Folder List (see page 12).
pages 17 and 29 for details.) For CD changer:
• Holding either of the buttons can display the
Disc List (see page 12).
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
compatible CD changer with your unit. (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. These units, however, are not
compatible with MP3 discs. To select a number from 01 – 06:
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD
changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD To select a number from 07 – 12:
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text
compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track • To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/


USB, it is required that folders are assigned
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks To select a particular track in a folder (for


MP3/WMA/USB):

11

EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 11 12/23/05 9:47:13 AM


Other main functions 5 Change to the selected item.

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

• When appears on the display, you can • The list disappears and playback starts.
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
1
Only possible on JVC
2 Select “LIST.” MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks


within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track


whose number is a single digit (1 to 9).
3 Select the list type.

Each time you press the button, you can


skip 10 tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be
*1 Selectable only when the source is selected and vice versa.
“CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the media is MP3,
WMA, or USB. 3

4 Select an item.

EX.: When “File” is selected in step 3

• You can move to the other lists by


pressing number button 5 ( ) or
6( ) repeatedly.

12

EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 12 12/23/05 9:47:14 AM


Prohibiting disc ejection 7 Repeat play
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

• “No Eject” appears on the display. Mode Plays repeatedly


Track: The current track [ ].
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder
procedure. [ ].
• “Eject OK” appears on the display. Disc*2: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

Selecting the playback modes


7 Random play
You can use only one of the following playback
modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode. Mode Plays at random


7 Intro play Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on [ ].
Disc*3: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
All*4: All tracks of the inserted discs
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Mode Plays beginning 15 seconds of...
*1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/
Track: All tracks of the current disc or USB).
USB memory [ ]. *2 Only while playing discs in the CD
Folder*1: First tracks of all folders changer.
[ ]. *3 Only while playing a disc.
Disc*2: First tracks of all the inserted *4 Only while playing discs in the CD
discs [ ]. changer or playing a USB memory.
Off: Cancels.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

13

EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 13 12/23/05 9:47:15 AM


2 Use 4/¢ to select a
Sound adjustments cutoff frequency to the subwoofer.
• 80Hz: Frequencies higher than
80 Hz are cut off.
Adjusting the sound • 120Hz: Frequencies higher than
120 Hz are cut off.
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your • 160Hz: Frequencies higher than
preference. 160 Hz are cut off.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing 3 Turn the control dial to adjust the
number button 3. subwoofer output level. [0 to 8]

C VolAdjust
1 Turn the control dial to adjust the input
level of each source (except FM).
[–5 to +5]
2 Adjust to match the input level of the
FM sound level.
• Before making an adjustment, select a
source you want to adjust.

D Loudness
Turn the control dial to activate or
• For “EQ” setting, see the following.
deactivate the loudness to produce a
well-balanced sound at low volume
3 Adjust the selected setting item. levels. [Off or On]
A Fad/Bal (Fader/Balance)
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to 4 Exit from the setting.
move to the “Fad/Bal” adjustment
display.
2 Adjust the speaker output balance
by pressing:
5 / ∞: between the front and rear
speakers. [F06 to R06]
4/¢ :
Selecting preset sound modes
between the left and right (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
speakers. [L06 to R06]
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to
the music genre.
B Subwoofer
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to Available sound modes
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment
FLAT (No sound mode is applied), H.ROCK
display.
(Hard rock), R & B (Rhythm & blues),
POP, JAZZ, DANCE, COUNTRY, REGGAE,
CLASSIC, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3

14

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 14 12/23/05 9:47:46 AM


Storing your own sound modes Sound Range/selectable items
elements Low Mid High
You can adjust the sound modes and store your
own adjustments in memory. Level –06 to –06 to –06 to
• When appears on the display, you can +06 +06 +06
move back to the previous display by pressing FREQ 60 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz
number button 3. (Frequency) 80 Hz 1 kHz 12.5kHz
100 Hz 1.5kHz 15 kHz
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
Q (Band Q1.0 Q0.5 Fix
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 14. Q2.0 Q1.25
• In step 2, select “EQ.”
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
2 Select a sound mode. frequency ranges.

6 Store the adjustments.

To display the rest

3 Select a frequency range.

4 Adjust the sound elements of the


selected frequency range.
1 Use 5 / ∞ to adjust the level.
2 Press number button 2 ( ),
then turn the control dial to select the
frequency.
3 Press number button 2 ( ), then
turn the control dial to select the band
width.

15

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 15 12/23/05 9:47:52 AM


The list below shows the preset value setting for each sound mode:
Preset values
Sound Low Mid High
modes Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band
(Frequency) width) (Frequency) width) (Frequency) width)
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
H.ROCK +03 100 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
JAZZ +03 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz Fix
DANCE +04 60 Hz Q1.0 -02 1 kHz Q1.0 +01 10 kHz
COUNTRY +02 60 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.0 +02 12.5kHz
REGGAE +03 60 Hz Q1.25 +02 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 12.5kHz
CLASSIC +01 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz

General settings — PSM


Basic procedure 3 Select a PSM item.

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)


items listed in the table that follows.
• By pressing either of the buttons
repeatedly, you can also move to the item
1 of the other categories.

4 Adjust the selected PSM item.

An item previously selected appears on the


display.
2 Select a PSM category.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust other
PSM items if necessary.

6 Exit from the setting.


To display the rest

16

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 16 12/23/05 9:47:53 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Demo/Link Demo: [Initial]; Display demonstration will be
Display activated automatically, [6].
demonstration Image Link: To show a still image while playing MP3/
WMA tracks, [11, 29].
Off: Cancels.
• Still image appears if no operation is done for about
MOVIE

20 seconds.
LevelMeter You can select the different level meter patterns.
Audio level meter Meter 1 [Initial] O Meter 2
• Press DISP repeatedly to show the selected level meter.
Pict Download: [Initial]; Download files, [19].
Pictures Set: Activate the stored files, [22]
Delete: Delete the stored files, [21].
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [6]
Hour adjustment [Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
CLOCK

Clock Min 00 – 59, [6]


Minute adjustment [Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
24H/12H 12Hours – 24Hours, [6]
Time display mode [Initial: 12Hours]
Scroll Once: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.
Scroll Auto: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals).
Off: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the
display regardless of the setting.
Dimmer Auto: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on
Dimmer the headlights.
Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Time Set: Set the timer for dimmer, [22].
DISPLAY

Any hour – Any hour


From – To*1: [Initial: 6PM – 7AM]
Contrast 1 – 10: [Initial: 5]; Adjust the display contrast to
Contrast make the display indications clear and
legible.
LCD Type Negative: [Initial]; Negative pattern of the display
Display type (except still images and animation).
Auto: Positive pattern will be selected during the
day time*2; while negative pattern will be
used during the night time*2.
Positive: Positive pattern of the display.
*1 Adjustable only when “Dimmer” is set to “Time Set.”
*2 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.

Continued on next page...


17

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 17 12/23/05 9:47:55 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Font Type You can select the font type used on the display.
Font type 1 [Initial] O 2
DISPLAY

Tag On: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information display


Tag display while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].
Off: Cancels.
IF Band Auto: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to
Intermediate reduce interference noises between close
frequency filter stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
TUNER

Wide: Subject to the interference noises from


adjacent stations, but sound quality will
not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
Ext Input*3 Changer: [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [9], an
External input Apple iPod or a JVC D. player, [24].
Ext In: To use any other external component than
the above, [26].
Beep On: [Initial]; Activates the key-touch tone.
Key-touch tone Off: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
Telephone Muting1/Muting2: Select either one which mutes the
AUDIO

Telephone muting sounds while using a cellular phone.


Off: [Initial]; Cancels.
• If CD, CD changer, or USB has been selected as the source,
playback pauses during telephone muting.
Amp Gain You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Amplifier gain High PWR: [Initial]; Volume 00 – Volume 50
control Low PWR: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the
maximum power of the speaker is less than
50 W to prevent them from being damaged.)
Color Sel [Initial: All Source]; You can select your favorite display color
Color selection for each source (or for all sources), [22].
Color Set You can create your own colors, and select them for the
display color, [23].
COLOR

Day Color: User color during the day time*4.


NightColor: User color during the night time*4.
Red +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Green +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Blue +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
*3 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—TUNER, CD, or USB.
*4 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.

18

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 18 12/23/05 9:47:55 AM


• To download the file(s), see the following.
Graphic displays • To delete the file(s), see pages 20 and 21.
• To activate the file(s), see page 22.
Before starting the following procedure,
prepare a CD-R including still images (pictures)
and animations (movies).
• With Image Converter (Ver 3.0) included in IMPORTANT:
the supplied CD-ROM, you can create and • Refer also to Image Converter PDF files
download your own images and animations. included in the “Manual” folder on the
(Samples are included in the CD-ROM.) supplied CD-ROM.
These images/animation will be shown during • Still images (pictures) and animations
playing a source. (movie) should have the following
• You can store “LARGE” or “SMALL” pictures extension code in their file names:
and movies. – jtl: for large size still images
Picture: 30 still images each – jtm: for small size still images
Movie: 60 frames each – jta: for large size animations
– jtb: for small size animations
Basic procedure – jtw: for Image Link (see pages 11 and 17)
• Before you download or delete the files,
• When appears on the display, you can observe the following:
move back to the previous display by pressing – Do not download a file while driving.
number button 3. – Do not turn off the ignition key of the car
• When / appears on the display, while downloading or deleting a file.*
you can move to the other lists by pressing – Do not detach the control panel while
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly. downloading or deleting a file.*
– Do not attach or detach a USB memory
1 Insert a CD-R or the supplied while downloading a file.*
CD-ROM. * If you do so, the file download or deletion
will not be done correctly.

2 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.


• In step 2, select “MOVIE.”
• In step 3, select “Pict.” Downloading pictures or an animation
• It takes a long time to download an
animation. For details, see page 30.
3 Select an item. • To activate the downloaded files, see page 22.

1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on left column.


• In step 3, select “Download.”

4 Select a picture size.

or

The display goes to the PICT menu.

Continued on next page...


19

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 19 12/23/05 9:47:56 AM


2 8 • To download more pictures from
the same folder, repeat steps 5 to 7.
• To download more pictures from
another folder, press number button
3( ). Then, repeat steps 3 to 7.

9 Exit from the setting.

“File Check” flashes and then the Folder List


appears on the display. Deleting the files
Deleting the stored animation
3 Select a folder.
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

2
4 Display the File List.

5 Select a file.
EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
step 4 on page 19

3 Delete the animation.


6 Confirm the selection.

EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected 4 Exit from the setting.

7 Download the file.

20

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 20 12/23/05 9:47:57 AM


Deleting the stored pictures 4 Exit from the setting.
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

2 Deleting all the stored files


1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

The File List appears on the display.

3 • To delete one of the stored pictures


1 Use 5 / ∞ to select a file. Then, press
number button 1 ( ) to confirm EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
the selection. step 4 on page 19

3 Delete all the stored files.


EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete the selected file.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to delete more
pictures. 4 Exit from the setting.

• To delete all the stored pictures


1 Press number button 2 ( ).

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in step 4 on page


19
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete all the stored pictures.

21

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 21 12/23/05 9:47:58 AM


Activating the downloaded files
Setting the time for dimmer
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
• When appears on the display, you can
• In step 3, select “Set.”
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
2 Select the display type.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.
• In step 2, select “DISPLAY.”
• In step 3, select “Dimmer.”

2 Select “Time Set.”

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in


step 4 on page 19 and “Movie”
is selected

Movie Your edited animation stored


in “Movie” is activated. \ Go 3 Adjust the dimmer time.
to step 3. 1 Turn the control dial to set the dimmer
Picture One of your edited still images time.
stored in “Picture” is activated. 2 Press ¢ to select “To.” Then, turn
\ Go to step 3. the control dial to set the dimmer end
Slideshow All stored still images are time.
activated and shown in
sequence (UserSlide). 4 Exit from the setting.
• If no still image is stored,
beeps sound.

3 Select a file.*

Changing the display color


You can select your favorite display color for
each source (or all sources).
The unit returns to the playback display.
• When appears on the display, you can
• To display the activated files, see page 7. move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
* If no still image or no animation is stored, you
can only select “Default.”

22

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 22 12/23/05 9:47:59 AM


Setting the display color 6 Exit from the setting.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.
• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
• In step 3, select “Color Sel.”
Creating your own color—User Color
2 You can create your own colors—“Day Color”
or “NightColor.”

1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.


• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
3 Select a source. • In step 3, select “Color Set.”

2 Select “Day Color” or “NightColor.”

All Source*1 O CD O Changer (or Ext


In*2) O USB*3 O FM O AM O Ipod*3/
D.PLAYER*3 O (back to the beginning)

*1 When you select “All Source,” you can use


the same color for all the sources.
*2 Depends on the “Ext Input” setting, see
page 18.
*3 Displayed only when the target
component is connected.
3 Select a primary color.
4 Select a color.

4 Adjust the level (+00 to +11) of the


Every*4 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O Leaves selected primary color.
O Grass O Apple O Rose O Amber
O Honey O Violet O Grape O Pale O
User*5 O (back to the beginning)

*4 The color changes every 2 seconds.


*5 The user-edited colors—“Day Color” and
“NightColor” will be applied (see right 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
column for details). primary colors.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the color 6 Exit from the setting.
for each source (except when selecting
“All Source” in step 3).

23

EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 23 12/23/05 9:48:00 AM


3 Assign a title.
Title assignment 1 Press number button 4 ( )
repeatedly to select a character set.
You can assign titles to station frequencies, CDs
(both in the unit and the CD changer), and
external components (Ext In).

Maximum number of
Sources
characters
FM/AM tuner Up to 10 characters (up to 30 2 Turn the control dial to select a
station frequencies including character.
both FM and AM) • For available characters, see page 30.
CDs/CD-CH* Up to 32 characters (up to 3 Use 4/¢ to move to the next
30 discs) (or previous) character position.
External Up to 8 characters 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you finish
components entering the title.
* You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or MP3/
WMA/USB. 4 Store the title.

• When appears on the display, you can


move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.

1 Select the sources. To erase the entire title


• For FM/AM tuner: Tune into a station. In step 3 above...
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external components: Select “Ext In”
(see page 18).

2 Display the TITLE input screen.


iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:


Connect either one of the following (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of this unit.
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for
controlling an iPod.
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for
controlling a D. player.

24

EN24-27KD-G824[UI]1.indd 24 12/23/05 9:48:28 AM


• For connection, see Installation/Connection To fast-forward or reverse the track
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied
with the interface adapter.

Caution: To go to the next or previous tracks

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the


vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Preparations: Selecting a track from the menu


Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external
input setting (see page 18). 1 Enter the main menu.

~
Now the 4/¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons.*

Ÿ 2 Select the desired menu.

Playback starts automatically from where For iPod:


it has been paused (for iPod) or stopped Playlists O Artists O Albums O Songs
(for D. player) previously. O Genres O Composers O (back to the
beginning)
! Adjust the volume.
For D. player:
Playlist O Artist O Album O Genre O
Track O (back to the beginning)

⁄ Adjust the sound mode as you want.


* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
(See pages 14 – 16.) – When you confirm the selection of a track.
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.

To pause (only for iPod) or stop (only for


D. player) playback

• To resume playback, press it again.


Continued on next page...
25

EN24-27KD-G824[UI]1.indd 25 12/23/05 9:48:34 AM


3 Confirm the selection. 7 Random play

To move back to the previous


menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts


automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 Mode Plays at random
until the desired track is played.
Song: Functions the same as “Shuffle
• Holding 4/¢ can skips 10
Songs” of the iPod [ ] or
items at a time.
“Random Play = On” of the
D. player [ ].
Album*: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Selecting the playback modes Albums” of the iPod [ ].
Off: Cancels.
1 * For iPod: Only if you select “All Albums”
in “Albums” of the main
“MENU.”
2 Select your desired playback mode.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
7 Repeat play pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

Other external component


operations
Mode Plays repeatedly You can connect an external component to
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line
One: Functions the same as “Repeat
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Mode = One” for the D. player
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
[ ].
Manual (separate volume).
All: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat
• For listening to the USB memory, see page 10.
Mode = All” for the D. player
• For listening to an iPod or a D. player, see
[ ].
pages 24 – 26.
Off: Cancels.

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 18


and select the external input (“Ext In”).

26

EN24-27KD-G824[UI]1.indd 26 12/23/05 9:48:34 AM


Ÿ Turn on the connected component
Disc operations
and start playing the source. Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does
! Adjust the volume. not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.

General
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
pages 14 – 16.)
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),
MP3 and WMA formats.
More about this unit • If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same playback source
again, playback starts from where it has been
Basic operations stopped previously.
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also Inserting a disc
turn on the power. If the source is ready, • When a disc is inserted upside down, “Please
playback also starts. Eject” appears on the display. Press 0 to eject
the disc.
Turning off the power • Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and
• If you turn off the power while listening to a unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into
disc, disc play will start from where playback the loading slot.
has been stopped previously, next time you
turn on the power. Playing a disc
– For MP3/WMA disc: Disc play will start • While playing an audio CD: If a title has been
from the first track of the current folder if assigned to the audio CD (see page 24), it will
a <jtw> file is included and Image Link is be shown on the display.
activated (see page 17). • While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent
Tuner operations sounds.
Storing stations in memory
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and • Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
stations are stored newly. • This unit can play back only files of the same
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest type which are first detected if a disc includes
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency). both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
– When SSM is over, the station stored in WMA files.
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in. • This unit can play back multi-session discs;
• When storing a station manually, the however, unclosed sessions will be skipped
previously preset station is erased when a new while playing.
station is stored in the same preset number.

Continued on next page...


27

EN24-27KD-G824[UI]1.indd 27 12/23/05 9:48:36 AM


• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played • The maximum number of characters for file/
back on this unit because of their disc folder names vary among the disc format used
characteristics, or for the following reasons: (includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
– Discs are dirty or scratched. <.wma>).
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens – ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
inside the unit. – ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty. – Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are – Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters
written with “Packet Write” method. – Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)
– There are improper recording conditions characters
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions * The parenthetic figure is the maximum
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.). number of characters for file/folder names in
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time case the total number of files and folders is
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than 313 or more.
that of regular CDs. • This unit can play back files recorded in VBR
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs: (variable bit rate).
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy
seal stuck to the surface. in elapsed time display, and do not show
– Discs on which labels can be directly the actual elapsed time. Especially, after
printed by an ink jet printer. performing the search function, this
Using these discs under high temperatures or difference becomes noticeable.
high humidities may cause malfunctions or • This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
damage to the unit. 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
Playing an MP3/WMA disc – MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
format.
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
• This unit can show the names of albums,
– WMA files encoded with lossless,
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,
professional, and voice format.
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA
– WMA files which are not based upon
files.
Windows Media® Audio.
• This unit can display only one-byte
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
characters. No other characters can be
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
correctly displayed.
ATRAC3, etc.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
• The search function works but search speed is
meeting the conditions below:
not constant.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

28

EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 28 12/23/05 9:48:59 AM


Playing MP3/WMA track from a USB memory Image Link
• While playing from a USB memory, the • Image Link will not work in the following
playback order may differ from other players. cases:
• This unit may be unable to play back some – If no <jtw> file is included in an MP3/
USB memories or some files due to their WMA folder.
characteristics or recording conditions. – If Intro play is activated.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories – If the source is changed to another from
and connection ports, some USB memories “CD.”
may not be attached properly or the • If more than one <jtw> file are included in a
connection might be loose. folder, a file with the youngest file number is
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory used for Image Link.
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from
pressing the 0 button. Ejecting a disc
• If the connected USB memory does not have
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
the correct files, “No Files” appears and the
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted
unit returns to the previous source.
again into the loading slot to protect it from
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
dust. (Disc will not be played this time.)
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
meeting the conditions below: Sound adjustment
– Bit rate: General
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)
fader level to the center (“00”).
WMA: 5 kbps — 320 kbps
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a
– Sampling frequency:
subwoofer is connected.
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1)
• You cannot change the input level—
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If you try to
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
adjust it for FM, “Fix” will appear.
(MPEG-2.5)
WMA: 8 kHz — 48 kHz
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in Graphic display
VBR (variable bit rate). General
• The maximum number of characters for • You can display two sizes of pictures and
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 animations.
characters for MP3/WMA tag information. – LARGE: <jtl> for still pictures and <jta> for
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files the animations;
and 250 folders (999 files per folder). The image is displayed with the
dimension of the screen.
– SMALL: <jtm> for still pictures and <jtb>
for animations;
The image is displayed like a
CD jacket (on the left side of the
display).
• Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
longer time to show it on the display.

Continued on next page...


29

EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 29 12/23/05 9:49:04 AM


Downloading (or deleting) files Title assignment
• You can download a file only while selecting • If you try to assign titles to more than 30
“CD” for the playback source; on the other station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name
hand, you can delete a file while selecting any Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before
source. assignment.
• After finishing the procedure to download a • Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can
file, playback starts from the beginning. also be shown if you play back the disc from
• If you have already downloaded an animation, the unit and vice versa.
downloading a new animation deletes the
previously stored animation. Available characters on the display
• It takes a long time to download an
Capital letters
animation.
– About 3 to 4 seconds for a still image (one
frame).
– About 1 to 2 minutes for an animation of 30
Small letters
frames.
– About 3 minutes for an animation of 60
frames.
• If you try to operate the downloading
Numbers and symbols
procedure from a disc without any <jtl>,
<jtm>, <jta>, and <jtb> files, beeps sound.
• If you try to store more than 30 images
for each size “LARGE” and “SMALL,”
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start
downloading. Delete unwanted files before iPod or D. player operations
downloading. • When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
• If the total frame number of an animation D. player is charged through this unit.
downloaded exceeds 60, the frames exceeding • While the iPod or D. player is connected, all
that number are ignored. operations from the iPod or D. player are
disabled. Perform all operations from this
General settings—PSM unit.
• The text information may not be displayed
• “Auto” setting for “Dimmer” may not work
correctly.
correctly on some vehicles, particularly on
– Some characters such as accented letters
those having a control dial for dimming. In
cannot be shown correctly on the display.
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any
– Depends on the condition of
other than “Auto.”
communication between the iPod or
• If “LCD Type” is set to “Auto,” the display
D. player and the unit.
pattern will change to the “Positive” or
• If the text information includes more than
“Negative” pattern depending on the
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
“Dimmer” setting.
also page 17). This unit can display up to 40
• Changing the “Amp Gain” setting from
characters.
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” when the level
is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit
automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”

30

EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 30 12/23/05 9:49:04 AM


Notice: How to handle discs
When operating an iPod or D. player, When removing a disc from Center holder
some operations may not be performed its case, press down the center
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the holder of the case and lift the disc
following JVC web site: out, holding it by the edges.
For iPod users: • Always hold the disc by the
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
ks-pd100/index.html> When storing a disc into its case, gently insert
For D. player users: the disc around the center holder (with the
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ printed surface facing up).
ks-pd500/index.html> • Make sure to store discs into the cases after
use.

To keep discs clean


A dirty disc may not play correctly.
Maintenance If a disc does become dirty, wipe it
with a soft cloth in a straight line
from center to edge.
How to clean the connectors • Do not use any solvent (for example,
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
connectors. benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to
To play new discs
damage the connectors. New discs may have some rough
spots around the inner and outer
edges. If such a disc is used, this
unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Connector
Do not use the following discs:

Moisture condensation Warped disc


Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car. Sticker Sticker residue
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until Stick-on label
the moisture evaporates.

31

EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 31 12/23/05 9:49:04 AM


Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service
center.

Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
speakers. • Check the cords and connections.
General

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• “Connect Error” appears on the Remove the control panel, wipe the connector,
display. then attach it again (see page 2).
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually.
FM/AM

work.
• Static noise while listening to the Connect the antenna firmly.
radio.
• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
back. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot which you used for recording.
be skipped.
Disc playback

• Disc can be neither played back nor • Unlock the disc (see page 13).
ejected. • Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
Disc,” “Loading Error,” or “Eject
Error” flashes).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
MP3/WMA playback

the file names.


• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
(“File Check” keeps flashing on the
display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are
you have intended them to play. recorded.

32

EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 32 12/23/05 9:49:05 AM


Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs while playing. This is
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
MP3/WMA playback

• “Not Support” appears on the display Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate
and track skips. format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA
track.
• “NO MUSIC” appears on the display. Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 30).
• Noise is generated. The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the • Readout time varies depending on the USB
display. memory.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Attach a USB memory that contains tracks
encoded in an appropriate format.
USB memory playback

• “Not Support” appears on the display The track is unplayable.


and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, • The attached USB memory may be
then returns to the previous source. malfunctioning, or may not have been
formatted correctly.
The files included in the USB memory are
corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory
repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the
display.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 30).
• While playing a track, sound is MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied
sometimes interrupted. into the USB memory.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB
memory, and try again.
CD changer

• “No Disc” appears on the display. Insert a disc into the magazine.
• “No Magazine” appears on the Insert the magazine.
display.

Continued on next page...


33

EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 33 12/23/05 9:49:05 AM


Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly
CD changer

and press the reset button of the CD changer.


• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Press the reset button of the CD changer.
the display.
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• Download does not seem to finish. It takes quite a long time to download an
animation with many frames (see page 30).
• Animation does not move. Wait until the operating temperature resumes.
PICT—PSM

• The display graphic function does


not work correctly.
• You cannot select an image or Select an image only after downloading the
animation for “Set” in “Pict.” appropriate files in memory.
(“Default” cannot be changed for
“Movie” and “Picture, ” or beeps
sound for “Slideshow.”)
• The iPod or D. player does not turn • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
on or does not work. • Update the firmware version.
• Change the battery.
• Buttons do not work as intended. The functions of the buttons have been changed.
Press MODE before performing the operation.
• The sound is distorted. Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the
iPod/D. player.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display. Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Playback stops. The headphones are disconnected during
iPod/D. player playback

playback. Restart the playback operation using


the control panel (see page 25).
• No sound can be heard when Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard. Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,
• “Error 01” appears on the display connect it again.
when connecting a D. player.
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK” No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or
appears on the display. D. player.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and
the display. iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Check the connection between the adapter and
this unit.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.
not work after disconnecting from
this unit.

34

EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 34 12/23/05 9:49:06 AM


Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION
Maximum Power Output: Type: Compact disc player
Front: 50 W per channel Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical
Rear: 50 W per channel pickup (semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS): Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% Dynamic Range: 96 dB
total harmonic distortion. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% MP3 Decoding Format:
total harmonic distortion. MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Tone Control Range: WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding
Low: ±12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, Format:
200 Hz) Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Mid: ±12 dB (500 Hz, 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz, Playable USB memory:
2.5 kHz) Format: FAT 12/16/32
High: ±12 dB (10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
17.5 kHz) Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Max. Current: Less than 500 mA
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Line-Out Level/Impedance: GENERAL
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Power Requirement:
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Operating Voltage:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Grounding System: Negative ground
Other Terminal: CD changer
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
TUNER SECTION Dimensions (W × H × D):
Frequency Range: Installation Size (approx.):
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz 182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
[FM Tuner] Mass (approx.):
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
without notice.
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
[AM Tuner] registered trademarks or trademarks of
Sensitivity: 20 μV Microsoft Corporation in the United States
Selectivity: 35 dB and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.

35

EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 35 12/23/05 9:49:06 AM


Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0106DTSMDTJEIN

Rear_KD-G824[UI]1.indd 2 12/23/05 9:46:07 AM


KD-G824
Installation/Connection Manual

GET0361-002A 0106DTSMDTJEIN
[UI] EN
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers. INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
WARNINGS regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum
power is less than 50 W, change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the
speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it Heat sink
when removing this unit.
*1 When you stand the unit,
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: be careful not to damage
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit the fuse on the rear.
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.

Do the required electrical


connections.

Parts list for installation and connection


The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio
dealer immediately.

Bend the appropriate tabs


to hold the sleeve firmly in
place.

A/B C D
Hard case/Control panel Sleeve Trim plate Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

E F G H
Power cord Washer (ø5) Lock nut (M5) Mounting bolt
(M5 × 20 mm)

Insert the two handles, then pull them as


illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

I J K L M
Rubber cushion Handles Remote controller Battery CD-ROM
(Image Converter: Ver. 3.0)

When using the optional stay When installing the unit without
TROUBLESHOOTING Stay (option)
using the sleeve
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car
• The fuse blows. Fire wall radio and install the unit in its place.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? *2 Not supplied
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2 for this unit.
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected? Dashboard
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? Bracket*2
Screw (option)
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? Pocket
Flat type screws
• Noise interfere with sounds.
Bracket*2 (M5 × 8 mm)*2
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
Note:
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
When installing the unit on the mounting
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws.
• This unit does not work at all. If longer screws are used, they could damage the
* Have you reset your unit? Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. unit.
1

Instal1-2_KD-G824_[UI]f.indd 1 12/29/05 3:24:33 PM


ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A Typical connections
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Antenna connector
To subwoofer (see diagram )

15 A fuse
*1 Not supplied for this unit. Ignition switch

Rear ground terminal


Black
To metallic body or chassis of the car

Yellow *2 To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
Line out (see diagram ) (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Red
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

To CD changer or another external component (see diagram ) Fuse block


Blue To the automatic antenna if any
(250 mA max.)
Blue with white stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, Orange with white stripe
To car light control switch
this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be
turned on. Brown
To cellular phone system

White with black stripe White Gray with black stripe Gray Green with black stripe Green Purple with black stripe Purple

Left speaker (front) Right speaker (front) Left speaker (rear) Right speaker (rear)

B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic
your car stereo system. Remote lead Remote lead (Blue with white stripe) antenna if any
• Connect the remote lead (blue with
white stripe) to the remote lead of
the other equipment so that it can be Rear speakers
controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this JVC Amplifier
unit, connect them to the amplifier. JVC Amplifier Subwoofer
Leave the speaker leads of this unit
unused.
– The line output level of this unit is
kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds
reproduced from this unit. Front speakers Front speakers *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic
body or to the chassis of the car—to the place
When connecting an external
uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,
amplifier to this unit, turn down the remove the paint before attaching the wire).
gain control on the external amplifier JVC Amplifier
Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
to obtain the best performance from
this unit. *4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

C Connecting the external components


CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)
You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod*5 or D. player can be Apple iPod (separately
connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 purchased)
(for D. player).
CAUTION:
Before connecting the external
components, make sure that the unit is
turned off.
or
JVC D. player (separately
purchased) *5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.

JVC CD changer
*6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD
changer
CD changer jack

Other external component


• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

External component

CD changer jack External component

*7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)


3.5 mm stereo mini plug
*8 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

Instal1-2_KD-G824_[UI]f.indd 2 12/29/05 3:24:39 PM


РУCCKИЙ ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ

KD-G827

В соответствии с Законом Российской Федерации “О защите прав потребителей” срок службы


(годности) данного товара “по истечении которого он может представлять опасность для жизни,
здоровья потребителя, причинять вред его имуществу или окружающей среде” составляет семь (7)
лет со дня производства. Этот срок является временем, в течение которого потребитель данного
товара может безопасно им пользоваться при условии соблюдения инструкции по эксплуатации
данного товара, проводя необходимое обслуживание, включающее замену расходных материалов
и/или соответствующее ремонтное обеспечение в специализированном сервисном центре.
Дополнительные косметические материалы к данному товару, поставляемые вместе с ним, могут
храниться в течение двух (2) лет со дня его производства.
Срок службы (годности), кроме срока хранения дополнительных косметических материалов,
упомянутых в предыдущих двух пунктах, не затрагивает никаких других прав потребителя, в
частности, гарантийного свидетельства JVC, которое он может получить в соответствии с законом о
правах потребителя или других законов, связанных с ним.

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.


Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.


Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.

INSTRUCTIONS
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

GET0363-001A
[EE]

Cover_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 2 12/23/05 9:54:01 AM


Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
ENGLISH

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS


1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit How to use the MODE/SEL button


If you use MODE or SEL (select), the display
and some controls (such as the number buttons,
4/¢ buttons, 5/∞ buttons, and the
control dial) enter the corresponding control
mode.
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after
pressing MODE, to operate the FM tuner.
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

“Please Eject” appears on the display.

Works as time countdown indicator.

To use these controls for original functions


• If this does not work, reset your unit. again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects. of these buttons until the control is cleared.
• Pressing MODE again also restores original
functions. However, pressing SEL makes the
unit enters a different mode.
Caution:
If the temperature inside the car is below 0°C, the movement of animation and text scroll will be
halted on the display to prevent the display from being blurred. appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, and the operating temperature is resumed, these functions will
start working again.

EN02-05KD-G827[EE]f.indd 2 12/23/05 9:52:21 AM


How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with
CONTENTS

ENGLISH
the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in Control panel ................................... 4
“More about this unit” (see pages 35 – 39). Remote controller — RM-RK50 ................. 5
Getting started ................................. 6
Press briefly. Basic operations ................................................... 6
Radio operations .............................. 7
FM RDS operations ............................ 9
Press repeatedly. Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ....... 10
Disc/USB memory operations............. 12
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 12
Press either
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................ 12
one.
Playing a USB memory ......................................... 13
Sound adjustments ........................... 17
Press and hold until your
desired response begins. General settings — PSM ................... 19
Title assignment............................... 28
Press and hold both iPod®/D. player operations ................ 28
buttons at the same time. Other external component operations ... 30
DAB tuner operations........................ 31
The following marks are used to indicate...
More about this unit ......................... 35
: Built-in CD player operations.
Maintenance .................................... 39
: External CD changer operations. Troubleshooting ............................... 40
Specifications ................................... 43
: External USB memory operations.

Warning: For safety...


If you need to operate the unit while driving, • Do not raise the volume level too much, as
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be this will block outside sounds, making driving
involved in a traffic accident. dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any
complicated operations.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared Temperature inside the car...
with other sources. Lower the volume If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
before playing a disc to avoid damaging or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
the speakers by the sudden increase of the the car becomes normal before operating the
output level. unit.

EN02-05KD-G827[EE]f.indd 3 12/23/05 9:52:24 AM


Control panel
ENGLISH

Parts identification

1 BAND button 7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)


2 • Control dial button
• (standby/on attenuator) button 8 0 (eject) button
3 DISP (display) button 9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
4 Remote sensor p SRC (source) button
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to q (control panel release) button
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial w SEL (select) button
lighting). e MODE button
5 Display window r Number buttons
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons t 4/¢ buttons

How to detach/attach the control panel


Detaching... Attaching...

Lever CAUTION:
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while
the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back
into lock position before attaching the panel.

EN02-05KD-G827[EE]f.indd 4 12/23/05 9:52:25 AM


Remote controller — RM-RK50

ENGLISH
Installing the lithium coin battery Main elements and features
(CR2025)

Aim the remote controller directly at the 1 (standby/on/attenuator) button


remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is • Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
no obstacle in between. attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning: 2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Do not install any battery other than • Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with 5 U.
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may • Changes the preset stations (or services)
explode. with D ∞.
• Store the battery in a place where children • Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident. USB.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, • While playing an MP3 disc on an
cracking, or starting a fire: MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, – Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire. – Changes the folder if pressed and held.
– Do not leave the battery with other • While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
metallic materials. JVC D. player:
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or – Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
similar tools. D ∞.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate – Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now
when throwing away or saving it. 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons
Caution: • Adjusts the volume level.
4 SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (i-EQ: intelligent
equalizer).

* 5 U: Returns to the previous menu.


D ∞: Confirms the selection.

Continued on next page...


5

EN02-05KD-G827[EE]f.indd 5 12/23/05 9:52:25 AM


5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. ⁄ Adjust the volume.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
ENGLISH

• Searches for stations (or services) if


pressed briefly.
• Searches for ensembles if pressed and
held.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held. @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly. pages 17 – 19.)
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and To restore the sound, press it
held. again.

To turn off the power


Getting started
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
19 – 22.

Ÿ 1

2-1 Canceling the display


demonstrations
Turn the control dial to set “Demo/Link”
to “Off.”
* You cannot select these sources if they
are not ready or not connected.
2-2 Setting the clock
! 1 Press number button 4 (
“Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then,
).

turn the control dial to adjust the


hour.
• For FM/AM tuner
2 Press ¢ to select “Clock Min”
(minute). Then, turn the control
dial to adjust the minute.
• For DAB tuner

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 6 12/23/05 9:51:43 AM


3 Press ¢ to select “24H/12H.”
Then, turn the control dial to select
“24Hours” or “12Hours,” time

ENGLISH
display mode.

Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 20).


3 Exit from the setting.

Goes back to the initial display pattern.

*1 You can use your edited file for graphic screen


(see pages 23 – 26).
To check the current clock time when the Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
power is turned off a longer time to show it on the display.
*2 The information bar will disappear if no
operation is performed for five seconds.

Radio operations
Changing the display pattern
~
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

Ÿ
Source operation display
! Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching


“SMALL” (CD jacket image) graphic*1 is displayed.
stops.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast
with sufficient signal strength,
*2 lights up on the display.

To stop searching, press the same button


“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed. again.

Note:
FM1 and FM2: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz
FM3: 65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz

Continued on next page...


7

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 7 12/23/05 9:51:47 AM


To tune in to a station manually 2
In step ! on page 7...
ENGLISH

1
3 Select “SSM.”

2 Select a desired station frequency.

4
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
2 searched and stored automatically in the FM
band.

Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
3 Exit from the setting. number 4 of the FM1 band.

Using the number buttons


lights up on the display. 1
Reception improves, but stereo effect will
be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, select “Mono Off”


in step 2. goes off.
2

Storing stations in memory


You can preset six stations for each band.
3
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory) Using the Preset Station List
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you • When appears on the display, you can
want to store into. move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 8 12/23/05 9:51:48 AM


1 Follow steps 1 and 2 of “Using the
Listening to a preset station
number buttons” on page 8.

ENGLISH
• By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List Using the number buttons
will appear (go to step 4).
1
2

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you


3 Display the Preset Station List. want to listen to.

Using the Preset Station List


1 Display the Preset Station List, then
select the preset station you want to
listen to.
4 Select the preset number you want to
store into. 2 Change to the selected station.

• You can move to the lists of the other FM


bands by pressing number button 5
( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly.
FM RDS operations
5 Store the station.
What you can do with RDS
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations
to send an additional signal along with their
regular programme signals.
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the
following:
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see page 10)
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY
Standby Receptions (see page 11)
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 12)
• Programme Search (see page 21)

Continued on next page...


9

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 9 12/23/05 9:51:50 AM


Searching for your favorite ⁄ Start searching for your favorite
FM RDS programme programme.
ENGLISH

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your


favorite programme by searching for a PTY
code.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
If there is a station broadcasting a
number button 3.
programme of the same PTY code as you
~ have selected, that station is tuned in.

Ÿ Select “Search.”
Storing your favorite
programme types
You can store six favorite programme types.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.

1
The PTY Preset List including six preset
PTY codes appears on the display.

! Select a PTY code (see page 12). 2 Select “Memory.”

• You can select one from 35 PTY codes


including the first 6 preset codes
which can be preset as you like (see the 3 Select a preset number (“Preset1”–
following). “Preset6”) you want to store into.
• To display the other PTY Preset Lists,
press number button 5 ( ) or 6
( ) repeatedly.

4 Select one of the PTY codes.

10

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 10 12/23/05 9:51:51 AM


5 Store the selected PTY code. To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

ENGLISH
goes off.

PTY Standby Reception


PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to
switch temporarily to your favorite programme
type from any source other than AM.
EX.: When “Classics” is selected in step 4 on page 10 • This function also takes effect for the DAB
tuner.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to store other PTY To activate the PTY Standby Reception and
codes into other preset numbers. select the PTY codes

7 Exit from the setting. 1

2 Activating the PTY Standby Reception.


Display the currently selected PTY code.

Using the standby receptions


TA Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)
from any source other than AM.
• If a station starts broadcasting a traffic
3 Selecting a PTY code.
announcement, “Traffic News” appears on the
display, and this unit temporarily tunes in to
the station. The volume changes to the preset
TA volume level if the current level is lower
than the preset level (see page 21). 4 Exit from the setting.

To activate the TA Standby Reception


either lights up or flashes on either lights up or flashes on the display.
the display. • If lights up, PTY Standby Reception is
activated.
• If lights up, TA Standby Reception is • If flashes, PTY Standby Reception is not
activated. yet activated.
• If flashes, TA Standby Reception is not To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in
yet activated. (This occurs when you are to another station (or service) providing the
listening to an FM station without the RDS related signals. will stop flashing and
signals required for TA Standby Reception.) remain lit.
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in
to another station (or service) providing the To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception
related signals. will stop flashing and Select “PTY Off” in step 2 above.
remain lit. goes off.

11

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 11 12/23/05 9:51:53 AM


Tracing the same programme— Disc/USB memory
Network-Tracking Reception
ENGLISH

operations
When driving in an area where FM reception
is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically Playing a disc in the unit
tunes in to another FM RDS station of the
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
same network, possibly broadcasting the same
change the source or eject the disc.
programme with stronger signals (see the
illustration below).

When shipped from the factory, Network-


Tracking Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “AF-Regn’l” on page 21.

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas


(01 – 05) To stop playback and eject the disc

Playing discs in the CD changer


All discs in the magazine will be played
repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

~
PTY codes
News, Affairs, Info, Sport, Educate, Drama,
Culture, Science, Varied, Pop M (music),
Rock M (music), Easy M (music), Light M * If you have changed the external input
(music), Classics, Other M (music), Weather, setting to “Ext In” (see page 22), you
Finance, Children, Social, Religion, Phone In, cannot select the CD changer.
Travel, Leisure, Jazz, Country, Nation M
(music), Oldies, Folk M (music), Document
Ÿ Select a disc.
For disc number from 01 – 06:

For disc number from 07 – 12:

12

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 12 12/23/05 9:51:55 AM


Playing a USB memory Track and folder information (CD/CD Text/
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a MP3/WMA/USB)

ENGLISH
USB memory.
Once you insert a disc or attach a USB
All tracks in the USB memory will be played
memory, the total track number/total
repeatedly until you change the source.
playing time (for CD/CD Text) and total
• Removing the USB memory will also stop
folder number/total track number (for MP3/
playback.
WMA/USB) appears, then the following
~ information appears...

Ex.: When “CD-CH” is selected as the source

Current folder number*1


Current disc number*2 Elapsed playing time
File type*1*3 Current track number

Ÿ USB input terminal


• For the audio CD or CD Text:
Disc name*4 and Track name*5
• For the MP3/WMA/USB:
Folder name and File name, or
Album/performer*6 and Track name*6

USB memory • When playing CD changer, the total


numbers will not appear.
If a USB memory has been attached...
*1 Displayed only when an MP3/WMA
track is played back.
*2 Displayed only when “CD-CH” is selected
as the source.
*3 Either MP3 or WMA indicator lights up
depending on the detected file.
Playback starts from where it has been stopped
*4 Appears only for CD Texts and CDs if
previously.
it has been recorded or assigned. (“No
• If a different USB memory is currently
Name” appears if no name is recorded or
attached, playback starts from the beginning.
assigned.)
*5 Appears only for CD Texts. (“No Name”
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it
appears if no name is recorded.)
out from the unit.
*6 Appears only when “Tag” is set to “On”
(see page 21).
Cautions:
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might
hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all the important data has been
backed up to avoid losing the data.

13

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 13 12/23/05 9:51:56 AM


About MP3 and WMA tracks To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and MP3/WMA/USB)
ENGLISH

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded


For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

When an MP3/WMA folder in an MP3/


WMA disc includes an image <jtw> file
edited by Image Converter (Ver 3.0)—
supplied in the CD-ROM, you can show the For the main unit:
image on the display while the tracks in the • Holding either of the buttons can display the
folder are played back—Image Link. (See Folder List (see page 15).
pages 20 and 37 for details.) For CD changer:
• Holding either of the buttons can display the
Disc List (see page 15).
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
compatible CD changer with your unit. (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. These units, however, are not
compatible with MP3 discs. To select a number from 01 – 06:
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD
changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD To select a number from 07 – 12:
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text
compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track • To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/


USB, it is required that folders are assigned
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks To select a particular track in a folder (for


MP3/WMA/USB):

14

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 14 12/23/05 9:51:58 AM


Other main functions 5 Change to the selected item.

ENGLISH
Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

• When appears on the display, you can • The list disappears and playback starts.
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
1
Only possible on JVC
MP3-compatible CD changer
2 Select “LIST.”
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks
within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track


whose number is a single digit (1 to 9).
3 Select the list type.
1

Each time you press the button, you can


skip 10 tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be
selected and vice versa.
*1 Selectable only when the source is
“CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the media is MP3, 3
WMA, or USB.

4 Select an item.

EX.: When “File” is selected in step 3

• You can move to the other lists by


pressing number button 5 ( ) or
6( ) repeatedly.

15

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 15 12/23/05 9:52:00 AM


Prohibiting disc ejection 7 Repeat play
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
ENGLISH

• “No Eject” appears on the display. Mode Plays repeatedly


Track: The current track [ ].
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder
procedure. [ ].
• “Eject OK” appears on the display. Disc*2: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

Selecting the playback modes


7 Random play
You can use only one of the following playback
modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode. Mode Plays at random


7 Intro play Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on [ ].
Disc*3: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
All*4: All tracks of the inserted discs
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Mode Plays beginning 15 seconds of... *1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/
Track: All tracks of the current disc or USB).
USB memory [ ]. *2 Only while playing discs in the CD
Folder*1: First tracks of all folders changer.
[ ]. *3 Only while playing a disc.
Disc*2: First tracks of all the inserted *4 Only while playing discs in the CD
discs [ ]. changer or playing a USB memory.
Off: Cancels.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

16

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 16 12/23/05 9:52:02 AM


• 80Hz: Frequencies higher than
Sound adjustments 80 Hz are cut off.
• 120Hz: Frequencies higher than

ENGLISH
120 Hz are cut off.
Adjusting the sound • 160Hz: Frequencies higher than
160 Hz are cut off.
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference. 3 Turn the control dial to adjust the
• When appears on the display, you can subwoofer output level. [0 to 8]
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3. C VolAdjust
Turn the control dial to adjust the input
level of each source (except FM).
1 [–5 to +5]
Adjust to match the input level of the
FM sound level.
2 • Before making an adjustment, select a
source you want to adjust.

D Loudness
Turn the control dial to activate or
deactivate the loudness to produce a
• For “EQ” setting, see the following. well-balanced sound at low volume
levels. [Off or On]
3 Adjust the selected setting item.
A Fad/Bal (Fader/Balance) 4 Exit from the setting.
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to
move to the “Fad/Bal” adjustment
display.
2 Adjust the speaker output balance
by pressing:
5 / ∞: between the front and rear Selecting preset sound modes
speakers. [F06 to R06]
4/¢ : (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
between the left and right You can select a preset sound mode suitable to
speakers. [L06 to R06] the music genre.

B Subwoofer Available sound modes


1 Press number button 1 ( ) to FLAT (No sound mode is applied), H.ROCK
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment (Hard rock), R & B (Rhythm & blues),
display. POP, JAZZ, DANCE, COUNTRY, REGGAE,
2 Use 4/¢ to select a CLASSIC, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3
cutoff frequency to the subwoofer.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.

Continued on next page...


17

EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 17 12/23/05 9:52:03 AM


1 3 Press number button 2 ( ), then
turn the control dial to select the band
width.
ENGLISH

2 Select a sound mode.


Sound Range/selectable items
elements Low Mid High
Level –06 to –06 to –06 to
+06 +06 +06
To display the rest FREQ 60 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz
(Frequency) 80 Hz 1 kHz 12.5kHz
100 Hz 1.5kHz 15 kHz
200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
Q (Band Q1.0 Q0.5 Fix
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
Q1.5 Q1.0
3 Exit from the setting. Q2.0 Q1.25

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other


frequency ranges.
Storing your own sound modes
You can adjust the sound modes and store your
5 Store the adjustments.
own adjustments in memory.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.

1 Follow steps 1 and 2 above.

2 Select a frequency range.

3 Adjust the sound elements of the


selected frequency range.
1 Use 5 / ∞ to adjust the level.
2 Press number button 2 ( ),
then turn the control dial to select the
frequency.

18

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 18 12/23/05 9:53:02 AM


The list below shows the preset value setting for each sound mode:
Preset values

ENGLISH
Sound Low Mid High
modes Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band
(Frequency) width) (Frequency) width) (Frequency) width)
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
H.ROCK +03 100 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
JAZZ +03 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz Fix
DANCE +04 60 Hz Q1.0 -02 1 kHz Q1.0 +01 10 kHz
COUNTRY +02 60 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.0 +02 12.5kHz
REGGAE +03 60 Hz Q1.25 +02 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 12.5kHz
CLASSIC +01 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz

General settings — PSM


Basic procedure 3 Select a PSM item.

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)


items listed in the table that follows.
• By pressing either of the buttons
repeatedly, you can also move to the item
1 of the other categories.

4 Adjust the selected PSM item.

An item previously selected appears on the


display.
2 Select a PSM category.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust other
PSM items if necessary.

6 Exit from the setting.


To display the rest

Continued on next page...


19

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 19 12/23/05 9:53:05 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Demo/Link Demo: [Initial]; Display demonstration will be
ENGLISH

Display activated automatically, [6].


demonstration Image Link: To show a still image while playing MP3/
WMA tracks, [14, 37].
Off: Cancels.
• Still image appears if no operation is done for about
MOVIE

20 seconds.
LevelMeter You can select the different level meter patterns.
Audio level meter Meter 1 [Initial] O Meter 2
• Press DISP repeatedly to show the selected level meter.
Pict Download: [Initial]; Download files, [24].
Pictures Set: Activate the stored files, [26]
Delete: Delete the stored files, [24].
Clock Hr 0 – 23 (1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM), [7]
Hour adjustment [Initial: 0 (0:00)]
Clock Min 00 – 59, [7]
Minute adjustment [Initial: 00 (0:00)]
CLOCK

24H/12H 12Hours – 24Hours, [7]


Time display mode [Initial: 24Hours]
Clock Adj Auto: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically
Clock adjustment adjusted using the CT (clock time) data in
the RDS signal.
Off: Cancels.
Scroll Once: [Initial]; For disc information: scrolls the
Scroll disc information only once.
For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.
Auto: For disc information: repeats the scroll (in
5-second intervals).
For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.
Off: For disc information: cancels.
For DAB text: shows only headline if any.
DISPLAY

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the
display regardless of the setting.
Dimmer Auto: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on
Dimmer the headlights.
Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Time Set: Set the timer for dimmer, [26].
Any hour – Any hour
From – To*1: [Initial: 18 – 7]

20

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 20 12/23/05 9:53:06 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Contrast 1 – 10: [Initial: 5]; Adjust the display contrast to

ENGLISH
Contrast make the display indications clear and
legible.
LCD Type Negative: [Initial]; Negative pattern of the display
Display type (except still images and animation).
Auto: Positive pattern will be selected during the
DISPLAY

day time*2; while negative pattern will be


used during the night time*2.
Positive: Positive pattern of the display.
Font Type You can select the font type used on the display.
Font type 1 [Initial] O 2
Tag On: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information display
Tag display while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [13].
Off: Cancels.
AF-Regn’l When the received signals from the current FM RDS station
Alternative become weak....
frequency/ AF: [Initial]; Switches to another station (or
regionalization service) (the programme may differ from the
reception one currently received), [12, 34].
• The AF indicator lights up.
AF REG: Switches to another station broadcasting the
same programme.
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
Off: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is
TUNER

set to “On”).
TA Volume 0 — 30 or 0 — 50*3, [11]
Traffic announcement [Initial 15]
volume
P-Search On: Using the AF data, the unit tunes in to
Programme search another frequency broadcasting the same
programme as the original preset RDS
station is if the preset station signals are not
sufficient.
Off: [Initial]; Cancels
*1 Adjustable only when “Dimmer” is set to “Time Set.”
*2 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.
*3 Depends on the amplifier gain control.

Continued on next page...


21

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 21 12/23/05 9:53:07 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
IF Band Auto: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to
ENGLISH

Intermediate reduce interference noises between close


frequency filter stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference noises from
TUNER

adjacent stations, but sound quality will


not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
DAB AF*4 On: [Initial]; Traces the programme among DAB
Alternative frequency services and FM RDS stations, [12, 34].
reception Off: Cancels.
Ext Input*5 Changer: [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [12], an
External input Apple iPod or a JVC D. player, [28].
Ext In: To use any other external component than
the above, [30].
Beep On: [Initial]; Activates the key-touch tone.
Key-touch tone Off: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
Telephone Muting1/Muting2: Select either one which mutes the
AUDIO

Telephone muting sounds while using a cellular phone.


Off: [Initial]; Cancels.
• If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as
the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
Amp Gain You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Amplifier gain High PWR: [Initial]; Volume 00 – Volume 50
control Low PWR: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the
maximum power of the speaker is less than
50 W to prevent them from being damaged.)
Color Sel [Initial: All Source]; You can select your favorite display color
Color selection for each source (or for all sources), [26].
Color Set You can create your own colors, and select them for the
display color, [27].
COLOR

Day Color: User color during the day time*6.


NightColor: User color during the night time*6.
Red +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Green +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Blue +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
*4 Displayed only when the DAB tuner is connected.
*5 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—TUNER, CD, or USB.
*6 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.

22

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 22 12/23/05 9:53:09 AM


Graphic displays 4 Select a picture size.

ENGLISH
Before starting the following procedure,
prepare a CD-R including still images (pictures) or
and animations (movies).
• With Image Converter (Ver 3.0) included in
the supplied CD-ROM, you can create and The display goes to the PICT menu.
download your own images and animations.
(Samples are included in the CD-ROM.) • To download the file(s), see page 24.
These images/animation will be shown during • To delete the file(s), see pages 24 and 25.
playing a source. • To activate the file(s), see page 26.
• You can store “LARGE” or “SMALL” pictures
and movies.
Picture: 30 still images each IMPORTANT:
Movie: 60 frames each • Refer also to Image Converter PDF files
included in the “Manual” folder on the
supplied CD-ROM.
Basic procedure • Still images (pictures) and animations
• When appears on the display, you can (movie) should have the following
move back to the previous display by pressing extension code in their file names:
number button 3. – jtl: for large size still images
• When / appears on the display, – jtm: for small size still images
you can move to the other lists by pressing – jta: for large size animations
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly. – jtb: for small size animations
– jtw: for Image Link (see pages 14 and 20)
• Before you download or delete the files,
1 Insert a CD-R or the supplied observe the following:
CD-ROM. – Do not download a file while driving.
– Do not turn off the ignition key of the car
2 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 19. while downloading or deleting a file.*
• In step 2, select “MOVIE.” – Do not detach the control panel while
• In step 3, select “Pict.” downloading or deleting a file.*
– Do not attach or detach a USB memory
while downloading a file.*
3 Select an item. * If you do so, the file download or deletion
will not be done correctly.

23

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 23 12/23/05 9:53:10 AM


Downloading pictures or an animation 6 Confirm the selection.
• It takes a long time to download an
ENGLISH

animation. For details, see page 38.


• To activate the downloaded files, see page 26.

EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected


1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 23.
• In step 3, select “Download.”
7 Download the file.
2

8 • To download more pictures from


the same folder, repeat steps 5 to 7.
• To download more pictures from
another folder, press number button
3( ). Then, repeat steps 3 to 7.

“File Check” appears and then the Folder


List appears on the display. 9 Exit from the setting.

3 Select a folder.

Deleting the files


Deleting the stored animation
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 23.
4 Enter the File List. • In step 3, select “Delete.”

5 Select a file.

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in


step 4 on page 23

24

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 24 12/23/05 9:53:11 AM


3 Delete the animation. • To delete all the stored pictures
1 Press number button 2 ( ).

ENGLISH
EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in step 4 on page
23
4 Exit from the setting.
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete all the stored pictures.

4 Exit from the setting.


Deleting the stored pictures
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 23.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”
Deleting all the stored files
2
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 23.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

The File List appears on the display.

3 • To delete one of the stored pictures


1 Use 5 / ∞ to select a file. Then, press EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
number button 1 ( ) to confirm step 4 on page 23
the selection.
3 Delete all the stored files.

EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected


2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete the selected file.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to delete more 4 Exit from the setting.
pictures.

25

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 25 12/23/05 9:53:12 AM


Activating the downloaded files
Setting the time for dimmer
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 23.
ENGLISH

• When appears on the display, you can


• In step 3, select “Set.”
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
2 Select the display type.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 19.
• In step 2, select “DISPLAY.”
• In step 3, select “Dimmer.”

2 Select “Time Set.”

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in


step 4 on page 23 and “Movie”
is selected

Movie Your edited animation stored 3 Adjust the dimmer time.


in “Movie” is activated. \ Go 1 Turn the control dial to set the dimmer
to step 3. time.
Picture One of your edited still images 2 Press ¢ to select “To.” Then, turn
stored in “Picture” is activated. the control dial to set the dimmer end
\ Go to step 3. time.
Slideshow All stored still images are
activated and shown in 4 Exit from the setting.
sequence (UserSlide).
• If no still image is stored,
beeps sound.

3 Select a file.*
Changing the display color
You can select your favorite display color for
each source (or all sources).

The unit returns to the playback display. • When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
• To display the activated files, see page 7. number button 3.

* If no still image or no animation is stored, you


can only select “Default.”

26

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 26 12/23/05 9:53:13 AM


Setting the display color 6 Exit from the setting.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 19.

ENGLISH
• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
• In step 3, select “Color Sel.”
Creating your own color—User Color
2 You can create your own colors—“Day Color”
or “NightColor.”

1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 19.


• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
3 Select a source. • In step 3, select “Color Set.”

2 Select “Day Color” or “NightColor.”

All Source*1 O CD O Changer (or Ext


In*2) O USB*3 O FM O AM O DAB*3
O Ipod*3/D.PLAYER*3 O (back to the
beginning)

*1 When you select “All Source,” you can use


the same color for all the sources.
*2 Depends on the “Ext Input” setting, see
page 22.
*3 Displayed only when the target
component is connected. 3 Select a primary color.

4 Select a color.

4 Adjust the level (+00 to +11) of the


selected primary color.
Every*4 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O Leaves
O Grass O Apple O Rose O Amber
O Honey O Violet O Grape O Pale O
User*5 O (back to the beginning)

*4 The color changes every 2 seconds.


*5 The user-edited colors—“Day Color” and 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
“NightColor” will be applied (see right primary colors.
column for details).
6 Exit from the setting.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the color
for each source (except when selecting
“All Source” in step 3).

27

EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 27 12/23/05 9:53:15 AM


2 Turn the control dial to select a
Title assignment character.
• For available characters, see page 38.
ENGLISH

You can assign titles to CDs (both in the unit 3 Use 4/¢ to move to the next
and the CD changer) and external components (or previous) character position.
(Ext In).
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you finish
entering the title.
Maximum number of
Sources
characters
4 Store the title.
CDs/CD-CH* Up to 32 characters (up to
30 discs)
External Up to 8 characters
components
* You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or MP3/
To erase the entire title
WMA/USB.
In step 3 on the left...
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.

1 Select the sources.


• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external components: Select “Ext In” iPod®/D. player operations
(see page 22).
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.
2 Display the TITLE input screen.
Before operating your iPod or D. player:
Connect either one of the following (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of this unit.
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for
controlling an iPod.
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for
3 Assign a title. controlling a D. player.
1 Press number button 4 ( )
repeatedly to select a character set. • For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied
with the interface adapter.

28

EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 28 12/29/05 9:38:34 AM


Caution: To fast-forward or reverse the track
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

ENGLISH
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

To go to the next or previous tracks


Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external
input setting (see page 22).

~ Selecting a track from the menu


1 Enter the main menu.

Ÿ
Now the 4/¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons.*

Playback starts automatically from where 2 Select the desired menu.


it has been paused (for iPod) or stopped
(for D. player) previously.

! Adjust the volume.


For iPod:
Playlists O Artists O Albums O Songs
O Genres O Composers O (back to the
beginning)
⁄ Adjust the sound mode as you want.
For D. player:
(See pages 17 – 19.)
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or Playlist O Artist O Album O Genre O
D. player is deactivated. Track O (back to the beginning)

To pause (only for iPod) or stop (only for * The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
D. player) playback – If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.

• To resume playback, press it again.

29

EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 29 12/23/05 9:52:39 AM


3 Confirm the selection. 7 Random play
ENGLISH

To move back to the previous


menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts


automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 Mode Plays at random
until the desired track is played.
Song: Functions the same as “Shuffle
• Holding 4/¢ can skips 10
Songs” of the iPod [ ]or
items at a time.
“Random Play = On” of the
D. player [ ].
Album*: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Selecting the playback modes Albums” of the iPod [ ].
Off: Cancels.
1 * For iPod: Only if you select “All Albums”
in “Albums” of the main
“MENU.”
2 Select your desired playback mode.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
7 Repeat play pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

Other external component


operations
Mode Plays repeatedly You can connect an external component to
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line
One: Functions the same as “Repeat
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Mode = One” for the D. player
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
[ ].
Manual (separate volume).
All: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat
• For listening to the USB memory, see page 13.
Mode = All” for the D. player
• For listening to an iPod or a D. player, see
[ ].
pages 28 – 30.
Off: Cancels.

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 22


and select the external input (“Ext In”).

30

EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 30 12/23/05 9:52:40 AM


Ÿ Turn on the connected component Ÿ
and start playing the source.

ENGLISH
! Adjust the volume.
! Start searching for an ensemble.

When an ensemble is received, searching


⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See stops.
pages 17 – 19.) To stop searching, press the same button
again.

⁄ Select a service (either primary or


secondary) you want to listen to.
DAB tuner operations
What is DAB system?
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver
digital quality sound without any annoying
interference and signal distortion. Furthermore,
it can carry text, pictures, and data. When To tune in to an ensemble manually
transmitting, DAB combines several In step ! above...
programmes (called “services”) to form one 1
“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called
“primary service”—can also be divided into its
components (called “secondary service”). A
typical ensemble has six or more programmes
(services) broadcast at the same time. 2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.
By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do
the following:
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Alternative Frequency Reception (see “DAB
AF” on page 22).
It is recommended to use DAB tuner
When surrounding sounds are noisy
KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have
another DAB tuner, consult your JVC Some service provides Dynamic Range Control
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer. (DRC) signals together with their regular
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low
your DAB tuner. level sounds to improve for your listening.

1
~

Continued on next page...


31

EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 31 12/23/05 9:52:42 AM


2 Select one of the DRC signals levels (1, 2, 2 Select an ensemble (primary service).
or 3).
ENGLISH

3
The reinforcement increases from 1 to 3.

3 Exit from the setting.


Using the Preset Service List
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
appears on the display. • By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Service List
• will be highlighted only when will appear (go to step 4).
receiving DRC signals from the tuned
service. 2
To search for your favorite service
You can search for either Dynamic or Static 3 Display the Preset Service List.
PTY codes.
• Operations are exactly the same as explained
on page 10 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the
DAB tuner and the FM tuner.
• Search will be performed on the DAB tuner
only.

Storing DAB services in memory 4 Select a preset number you want to


store into.
You can preset six DAB services (primary) for
each band.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
• You can move to the lists of the other
EX.: Storing an ensemble (primary service) into DAB bands by pressing number button
the preset number 4 of the DAB 1 band. 5( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly, but
you cannot store the selected service into
Using the number buttons these bands.

32

EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 32 12/23/05 9:52:43 AM


5 Store the service.
Using the standby reception

ENGLISH
You can use three types of Standby Reception.
• Road Traffic News Standby Reception—TA
Standby Reception (see the following).
• Announcement Standby Reception (see the
following)
• PTY Standby Reception (see page 34).

Tuning in to a preset DAB service


Road Traffic News Standby Reception
Using the number buttons (TA Standby Reception)
Road Traffic News Standby Reception allows
1 the unit to switch temporarily to the Road
Traffic News (or Traffic Announcement) from
any source other than AM. The volume changes
to the preset TA volume level if the current level
2 Select the preset DAB service is lower than the preset level (see page 21).
(primary) number (1 – 6) you want to • Operations are exactly the same as explained
listen to. on page 11 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot use Road Traffic News Standby
Reception (TA Standby Reception) separately
for the DAB tuner and FM tuner.

If the selected primary service has some Announcement Standby Reception


secondary services, pressing the same
Announcement Standby Reception allows the
button again will tune in to the secondary
unit to switch temporarily to your favorite
services.
service (announcement type).

Using the Preset Service List To activate the Announcement Standby


1 Display the Preset Service List, then Reception and select the announcement type
select the preset DAB service you want
to listen to.
1

2 Change to the selected DAB service.


2 Activating the Announcement
Standby Reception.
Display the currently selected
announcement type.

Continued on next page...


33

EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 33 12/23/05 9:52:44 AM


3 Selecting an announcement type.
Tracing the same programme—
Alternative Frequency Reception
ENGLISH

You can keep listening to the same programme


by activating the Alternative Frequency
Reception.
4 Exit from the setting. • While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a service
cannot be received, this unit automatically
tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS
either lights up or flashes on the playback station, broadcasting the same programme.
display. • While receiving an FM RDS station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service
• If lights up, Announcement Standby is broadcasting the same programme as the
Reception is activated. FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit
• If flashes, Announcement Standby automatically tunes in to the DAB service.
Reception is not yet activated. When shipped from the factory, Alternative
To activate, tune in to another service Frequency Reception is activated.
providing the related signals. will stop To deactivate the Alternative Frequency
flashing and remain lit. Reception, see page 22.

To deactivate the Announcement Standby To show the Dynamic Label Segment (DLS)
Reception information
Select “Announce Off” in step 2 on page 33. While listening to an ensemble that supports
goes off. DLS....

Announcement types
Travel, Warning, News, Weather, Event, Lights up when receiving a service providing Dynamic Label
Special, Rad Inf (Radio Information), Sports, Segment (DLS)—DAB radio text.
Finance

PTY Standby Reception


PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to
switch temporarily to your favorite programme
type from any source other than AM.
• Operations are exactly the same as explained
on page 11 for FM RDS stations. • The DLS display will be temporarily
• PTY Standby Reception for DAB tuner works canceled when you operate the unit.
only using a dynamic PTY code.
• You can activate and deactivate PTY Standby To show whole text at once, press and hold
Reception when the source is either “FM” or DISP while DLS is displayed. Multi-line text
“DAB.” display appears.
• When the text contains more than 64
characters, another window appears to
show the rest of the text.
To restore the previous display, press and
hold DISP again.

34

EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 34 12/23/05 9:52:46 AM


• When Alternative Frequency Reception
More about this unit is activated (with AF selected), Network-
Tracking Reception is also activated

ENGLISH
automatically. On the other hand, Network-
Basic operations
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated
Turning on the power without deactivating Alternative Frequency
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also Reception. (See pages 21 and 22.)
turn on the power. If the source is ready, • TA Standby Reception and PTY Standby
playback also starts. Reception will be temporarily canceled while
Turning off the power listening to an AM station.
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
• If you turn off the power while listening to a
«http://www.rds.org.uk».
disc, disc play will start from where playback
has been stopped previously, next time you
turn on the power. Disc operations
– For MP3/WMA disc: Disc play will start Caution for DualDisc playback
from the first track of the current folder if • The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does
a <jtw> file is included and Image Link is not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
activated (see page 20). Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
Tuner operations not be recommended.
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search... General
– All previously stored stations are erased and • This unit has been designed to reproduce
stations are stored newly. CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency). MP3 and WMA formats.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in • If you change the source, playback also stops.
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in. Next time you select the same playback source
• When storing a station manually, the again, playback starts from where it has been
previously preset station is erased when a new stopped previously.
station is stored in the same preset number.
Inserting a disc
FM RDS operations • When a disc is inserted upside down, “Please
• Network-Tracking Reception requires Eject” appears on the display. Press 0 to eject
two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme the disc.
Identification) and AF (Alternative • Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and
Frequency) to work correctly. Without unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into
receiving these data correctly, Network- the loading slot.
Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.
• Receiving the Traffic Announcement by TA Playing a disc
Standby Reception, the volume level (TA
• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been
VOL) automatically changes to the preset
assigned to the audio CD (see page 28), it will
level if the current level is lower than the
be shown on the display.
preset level.
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent
sounds.
Continued on next page...
35

EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 35 12/23/05 9:52:47 AM


Playing a CD-R or CD-RW • This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
meeting the conditions below:
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
ENGLISH

• This unit can play back only files of the same


– Sampling frequency:
type which are first detected if a disc includes
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
WMA files.
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped
• The maximum number of characters for file/
while playing.
folder names vary among the disc format used
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
back on this unit because of their disc
<.wma>).
characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters
inside the unit.
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are
characters
written with “Packet Write” method.
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum
– There are improper recording conditions
number of characters for file/folder names in
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions
case the total number of files and folders is
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
313 or more.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than
(variable bit rate).
that of regular CDs.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
in elapsed time display, and do not show
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after
seal stuck to the surface.
performing the search function, this
– Discs on which labels can be directly
difference becomes noticeable.
printed by an ink jet printer.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
Using these discs under high temperatures or
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
high humidities may cause malfunctions or
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
damage to the unit.
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc – MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files format.
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> – MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower). – WMA files encoded with lossless,
• This unit can show the names of albums, professional, and voice format.
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, – WMA files which are not based upon
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA Windows Media® Audio.
files. – WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
• This unit can display only one-byte – Files which have the data such as WAVE,
characters. No other characters can be ATRAC3, etc.
correctly displayed. • The search function works but search speed is
not constant.

36

EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 36 12/23/05 9:53:28 AM


Playing MP3/WMA track from a USB memory • If more than one <jtw> file are included in a
folder, a file with the youngest file number is
• While playing from a USB memory, the
used for Image Link.

ENGLISH
playback order may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some
USB memories or some files due to their Ejecting a disc
characteristics or recording conditions. • If the ejected disc is not removed within
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories 15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted
and connection ports, some USB memories again into the loading slot to protect it from
may not be attached properly or the dust. (Disc will not be played this time.)
connection might be loose.
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory Sound adjustment
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from
pressing the 0 button. General
• If the connected USB memory does not have • If you are using a two-speaker system, set the
the correct files, “No Files” appears and the fader level to the center (“00”).
unit returns to the previous source. • Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, subwoofer is connected.
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files. • You cannot change the input level—
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files “VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If you try to
meeting the conditions below: adjust it for FM, “Fix” will appear.
– Bit rate:
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1) Graphic display
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)
WMA: 5 kbps — 320 kbps General
– Sampling frequency: • You can display two sizes of pictures and
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1) animations.
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2) – LARGE: <jtl> for still pictures and <jta> for
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz the animations;
(MPEG-2.5) The image is displayed with the
WMA: 8 kHz — 48 kHz dimension of the screen.
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in – SMALL: <jtm> for still pictures and <jtb>
VBR (variable bit rate). for animations;
• The maximum number of characters for The image is displayed like a
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 CD jacket (on the left side of the
characters for MP3/WMA tag information. display).
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files • Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
and 250 folders (999 files per folder). longer time to show it on the display.

Image Link Downloading (or deleting) files


• Image Link will not work in the following • You can download a file only while selecting
cases: “CD” for the playback source; on the other
– If no <jtw> file is included in an MP3/ hand, you can delete a file while selecting any
WMA folder. source.
– If Intro play is activated. • After finishing the procedure to download a
– If the source is changed to another from file, playback starts from the beginning.
“CD.”

Continued on next page...


37

EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 37 12/23/05 9:53:31 AM


• If you have already downloaded an animation, • Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can
downloading a new animation deletes the also be shown if you play back the disc from
previously stored animation. the unit and vice versa.
ENGLISH

• It takes a long time to download an


animation. Available characters on the display
– About 3 to 4 seconds for a still image (one
• This unit can display Romans alphabets
frame).
(A – Z, a – z), Cyrillic alphabets, numbers,
– About 1 to 2 minutes for an animation of 30
and symbols (see below).
frames.
These characters are also used to show the
– About 3 minutes for an animation of 60
various information on the display.
frames.
• If you try to operate the downloading
Upper case (Cyrillic alphabets)
procedure from a disc without any <jtl>,
<jtm>, <jta>, and <jtb> files, beeps sound.
• If you try to store more than 30 images
for each size “LARGE” and “SMALL,”
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start Lower case (Cyrillic alphabets)
downloading. Delete unwanted files before
downloading.
• If the total frame number of an animation
downloaded exceeds 60, the frames exceeding
Numbers and symbols
that number are ignored.

General settings—PSM
• “Auto” setting for “Dimmer” may not work
correctly on some vehicles, particularly on
those having a control dial for dimming. In iPod or D. player operations
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
other than “Auto.”
D. player is charged through this unit.
• If “LCD Type” is set to “Auto,” the display
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all
pattern will change to the “Positive” or
operations from the iPod or D. player are
“Negative” pattern depending on the
disabled. Perform all operations from this
“Dimmer” setting.
unit.
• Changing the “Amp Gain” setting from
• The text information may not be displayed
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” when the level
correctly.
is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit
– Some characters such as accented letters
automatically changes the volume level to
cannot be shown correctly on the display.
“Volume 30.”
– Depends on the condition of
communication between the iPod or
Title assignment D. player and the unit.
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 • If the text information includes more than
station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before also page 20). This unit can display up to 40
assignment. characters.

38

EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 38 12/23/05 9:53:32 AM


Notice: Moisture condensation
When operating an iPod or D. player, Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

ENGLISH
some operations may not be performed CD player in the following cases:
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the • After starting the heater in the car.
following JVC web site: • If it becomes very humid inside the car.
For iPod users: Should this occur, the CD player may
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and
ks-pd100/index.html> leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
For D. player users: the moisture evaporates.
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd500/index.html>
How to handle discs
DAB tuner operations When removing a disc from Center holder
its case, press down the center
• PTY Standby Reception works for the DAB
holder of the case and lift the disc
tuner only using a Dynamic PTY, but not a
out, holding it by the edges.
Static PTY.
• Always hold the disc by the
• TA Standby Reception for FM RDS station
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
and Road Traffic News Standby Reception for
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert
DAB cannot be set separately. The T/P button
the disc around the center holder (with the
always work for the both Standby Reception
printed surface facing up).
modes when the DAB tuner is connected.
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after
• Only primary DAB services can be presetted
use.
even when you store a secondary service.
• A previously preset DAB service is erased
when a new DAB service is stored in the same To keep discs clean
preset number. A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it
with a soft cloth in a straight line
from center to edge.
Maintenance • Do not use any solvent (for example,
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
How to clean the connectors benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the
connectors. To play new discs
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe New discs may have some rough
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth spots around the inner and outer
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to edges. If such a disc is used, this
damage the connectors. unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Connector
Do not use the following discs:
Sticker Sticker residue Stick-on label
Warped disc

39

EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 39 12/23/05 9:53:33 AM


Troubleshooting
ENGLISH

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service
center.

Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
speakers. • Check the cords and connections.
General

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• “Connect Error” appears on the Remove the control panel, wipe the connector,
display. then attach it again (see page 2).
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually.
FM/AM

work.
• Static noise while listening to the Connect the aerial firmly.
radio.
• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
back. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot which you used for recording.
be skipped.
Disc playback

• Disc can be neither played back nor • Unlock the disc (see page 16).
ejected. • Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
Disc,” “Loading Error,” or “Eject
Error” flashes).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
the file names.
• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not
MP3/WMA playback

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to


non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
(“File Check” keeps flashing on the
display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are
you have intended them to play. recorded.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs while playing. This is
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

40

EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 40 12/23/05 9:53:34 AM


Symptoms Remedies/Causes
MP3/WMA playback

• “Not Support” appears on the display Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate

ENGLISH
and track skips. format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA
track.
• “NO MUSIC” appears on the display. Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can display Roman alphabets, Cyrillic
(e.g. album name). alphabets, numbers and symbols (see page 38).
• Noise is generated. The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the • Readout time varies depending on the USB
display. memory.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Attach a USB memory that contains tracks
encoded in an appropriate format.
USB memory playback

• “Not Support” appears on the display The track is unplayable.


and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, • The attached USB memory may be
then returns to the previous source. malfunctioning, or may not have been
formatted correctly.
The files included in the USB memory are
corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory
repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the
display.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can display Roman alphabets, Cyrillic
(e.g. album name). alphabets, numbers and symbols (see page 38).
• While playing a track, sound is MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied
sometimes interrupted. into the USB memory.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB
memory, and try again.
• “No Disc” appears on the display. Insert a disc into the magazine.
• “No Magazine” appears on the Insert the magazine.
display.
CD changer

• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly
and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Press the reset button of the CD changer.
the display.
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).

Continued on next page...


41

EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 41 12/23/05 9:53:35 AM


Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Download does not seem to finish. It takes quite a long time to download an
ENGLISH

animation with many frames (see page 38).


• Animation does not move. Wait until the operating temperature resumes.
PICT—PSM

• The display graphic function does


not work correctly.
• You cannot select an image or Select an image only after downloading the
animation for “Set” in “Pict.” appropriate files in memory.
(“Default” cannot be changed for
“Movie” and “Picture, ” or beeps
sound for “Slideshow.”)
• The iPod or D. player does not turn • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
on or does not work. • Update the firmware version.
• Change the battery.
• Buttons do not work as intended. The functions of the buttons have been changed.
Press MODE before performing the operation.
• The sound is distorted. Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the
iPod/D. player.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display. Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Playback stops. The headphones are disconnected during
iPod/D. player playback

playback. Restart the playback operation using


the control panel (see page 29).
• No sound can be heard when Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard. Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,
• “Error 01” appears on the display connect it again.
when connecting a D. player.
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK” No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or
appears on the display. D. player.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and
the display. iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Check the connection between the adapter and
this unit.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.
not work after disconnecting from
this unit.
• “No DAB Signal” appears on the Move to an area with stronger signals.
display.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly
and reset the unit (see page 2).
DAB

• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the Check the cords and connections.
display.
• The DAB tuner does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly
and reset the unit (see page 2).
42

EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 42 12/23/05 9:53:35 AM


Specifications

ENGLISH
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION
Maximum Power Output: Type: Compact disc player
Front: 50 W per channel Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical
Rear: 50 W per channel pickup (semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS): Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% Dynamic Range: 96 dB
total harmonic distortion. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% MP3 Decoding Format:
total harmonic distortion. MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Tone Control Range: WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding
Low: ±12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz) Format:
Mid: ±12 dB (500 Hz, 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz) Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
High: ±12 dB (10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, Playable USB memory:
17.5 kHz) Format: FAT 12/16/32
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA
Line-Out Level/Impedance: Max. Current: Less than 500 mA
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ GENERAL
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance: Power Requirement:
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale) Operating Voltage:
Other Terminal: CD changer DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System: Negative ground
TUNER SECTION Allowable Operating Temperature:
Frequency Range: 0°C to +40°C
FM1/FM2 : 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Dimensions (W × H × D):
FM3 : 65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHz Installation Size (approx.):
AM : (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz 182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
[FM Tuner] Mass (approx.):
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
without notice.
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
[MW Tuner] registered trademarks or trademarks of
Sensitivity: 20 μV Microsoft Corporation in the United States
Selectivity: 35 dB and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
[LW Tuner]
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Sensitivity: 50 μV

43

EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 43 12/23/05 9:53:36 AM


Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Затруднения при эксплуатации?


Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства
обратитесь на соответствующую страницу

EN, RU
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0106DTSMDTJEIN

Rear_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 2 12/23/05 9:53:52 AM


KD-G827
Installation/Connection Manual
Руководство по установке/подключению
GET0363-002A 0106DTSMDTJEIN
[EE] EN, RU
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

ENGLISH РУССКИЙ
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В постоянного напряжения с минусом на
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR массе. Если Ваш автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор напряжения, который
ENTERTAINMENT dealers. может быть приобретен у дилера автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

WARNINGS ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем Вам отсоединить отрицательный
electrical connections before installing the unit. разъем аккумулятора и осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. • После установки обязательно заземлите данное устройство на шасси автомобиля.

Notes: Примечания:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR • Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем указанного класса. Если предохранитель
ENTERTAINMENT dealer. сгорает слишком часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear • Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change передней панели устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если максимальная
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS). мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в режим “Amp Gain”, чтобы предотвратить их
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape. повреждение (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22).
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit. • Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей
лентой.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается. Старайтесь его не трогать во время
удаления устройства.

Heat sink
Радиатор

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и подключению


• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit громкоговорителей:
will be seriously damaged. • НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in устройство будет повреждено.
your car. • ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю питания громкоговорителя
проверьте схему соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

Parts list for installation and connection Список деталей для установки и подключения
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством. При отсутствии какого-либо
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. элемента немедленно свяжитесь с дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.

A/B C D
Hard case/Control panel Sleeve Trim plate
Жесткий футляр/панель Муфта Декоративную панель
управления

E F G H
Power cord Washer (ø5) Lock nut (M5) Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)
Кабель питания Шайба (њ5) Фиксирующая гайка (M5) Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)

I J K L M
Rubber cushion Handles Remote controller Battery CD-ROM
Резиновый чехол Рычаги диcтaнциoннoго yпpaвлeния Бaтapeйкa (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
CD-ROM
(Image Converter: Ver 3.0)

Instal1-2_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 1 12/23/05 10:27:04 AM


INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING) УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка. Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы,
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в
kits. компанию, поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician. • Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это устройство, обратитесь к
квалифицированному специалисту.

Do the required electrical connections.


Выполните необходимые подключения
контактов, как показано на оборотной
стороне этой инструкции.

*1 When you stand the unit,


be careful not to damage the
fuse on the rear.
*1 Устанавливайте
устройство таким
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
образом, чтобы не
sleeve firmly in place.
повредить
Отогните соответствующие
предохранитель,
фиксаторы, предназначенные для
расположенный сзади.
прочной установки корпуса.

Removing the unit Удаление устройства


Before removing the unit, release the rear section. Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as


illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните
их, как показано на рисунке, чтобы
вынуть устройство.

When using the optional stay / При использовании When installing the unit without using the sleeve / При установке устройства без
дополнительной стойки использования муфты
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall Stay (option) В автомобилях “Toyota”, например, сначала удалите автомобильную магнитолу, затем установите на ее место
Стена Стойка (дополнительно) это устройство.
*2 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Не входит в комплект.
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)* 2
Приборная панель
Bracket*2
Screw (option) Кронштейн *2
Винт (дополнительно)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Pocket
Карман Bracket*2
Кронштейн *2

Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. are used, they could damage the unit.
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°. Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При
использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.

TROUBLESHOOTING BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ


• The fuse blows. • Сработал предохранитель.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?
• Power cannot be turned on. • Питание не включается.
* Is the yellow lead connected? * Подключен ли желтый провод?
• No sound from the speakers. • Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? * Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода громкоговорителей?
• Sound is distorted. • Звук искажен.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? * Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?
• Noise interfere with sounds. • Шум мешает звучанию.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords? * Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси автомобиля с помощью более
• This unit becomes hot. короткого и тонкого шнуров?
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? • Устройство нагревается.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
• This unit does not work at all. * Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?
* Have you reset your unit? • Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?
2

Instal1-2_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 2 12/23/05 10:27:07 AM


ENGLISH РУССКИЙ
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ
A If your car is equipped with the ISO For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi
connector / Если автомобиль оснащен или Opel (Vauxhall)
разъемом ISO You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated. • Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке. Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
Original wiring / Исходная схема соединений Modified wiring 1 / Преобразованная схема соединений 1

From the car body


A B
От корпуса автомобиля
C D

E F
G H
ISO connector
Разъем ISO
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему
I J
ISO connector of the supplied power cord соединений 2.
K L
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в
комплект поставки Modified wiring 2 / Преобразованная схема соединений 2
M N
O P

Y: Yellow R: Red
View from the lead side Желтый Красный
Вид со стороны выводов

B Connections without using the ISO connectors / Подключение без использования разъемов ISO
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное
damage to this unit. подключение может привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color. Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.
1 Cut the ISO connector. 1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below. 2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном ниже порядке.
3 Connect the aerial cord. 3 Подключите кабель антенны.
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit. 4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.

To subwoofer (see diagram )


К низкочастотный динамик
Aerial connector (см. схему )
Разъем антенны

15 A fuse
Предохранитель 15 A

*1 Not supplied for this unit. Ignition switch


Rear ground terminal *1 Не входит в комплект Переключатель зажигания
Задний разъем
заземления
Black
Черный
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Line out (see diagram ) К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
К выходу (см. схему )

To external components (see diagram ) Yellow *2


To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
К внешним устройствам (см. схему ) Желтый*2
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя
(минуя блок зажигания) (постоянный 12 В)

Red Fuse block


Красный Блок предохранителя
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.
*2 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите
этот провод, иначе питание не включится. Blue with white stripe
Синий с белой полосой
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)

Orange with white stripe


Оранжевый с белой полосой
To car light control switch
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля

Brown
Коричневый
To cellular phone system
К системе сотового телефона

White with black stripe White Gray with black stripe Gray Green with black stripe Green Purple with black stripe Purple
Белый с черной Белый Серый с черной Серый Зеленый с черной Зеленый Пурпурный с черной Пурпурный
полосой полосой полосой полосой

Left speaker (front) Right speaker (front) Left speaker (rear) Right speaker (rear)
Левый громкоговоритель Правый громкоговоритель Левый громкоговоритель Правый
(передний) (передний) (задний) громкоговоритель
(задний)

Instal3-4_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 3 12/23/05 10:26:38 AM


C Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Подключение внешних усилителей и/или Низкочастотный динамик
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system. Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной стереосистемы.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it • Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой полосой) к проводу внешнего
can be controlled through this unit. устройства другого оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker • Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного устройства, подключите их к усилителю.
leads of this unit unused. Оставьте провода громкоговорителей данного устройства неиспользованными.
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit. – Уровень выходного сигнала линии данного устройства поддерживается высоким, чтобы
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the обеспечить высококачественный звук, воспроизводимый данным устройством.
external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit. При подключении внешнего усилителя к данному устройству убавьте регулировку
усиления на внешнем усилителе, чтобы обеспечить оптимальные характеристики работы
данного устройства.

Remote lead Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)


Провод внешнего устройства Remote lead (Blue with white stripe) Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)
Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой) To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны

Rear speakers JVC Amplifier


Задние *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the
громкоговорители
JVC-усилитель
metallic body or to the chassis of the
Subwoofer
car—to the place not coated with paint (if
Низкочастотный
JVC Amplifier coated with paint, remove the paint before
динамик
JVC-усилитель attaching the wire). Failure to do so may
cause damage to the unit.
*3 Плотно прикрепите заземляющий
провод к металлическому кузову
Rear speakers
или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не
Задние громкоговорители
Front speakers покрытом краской (если оно покрыто
Front speakers (see diagram ) краской, удалите краску перед тем, как
Передние Передние
громкоговорители громкоговорители (см. схему ) прикреплять провод). Невыполнение
этого требования может привести к
*5 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s повреждению данного устройства.
JVC Amplifier ISO connector and connect them to the
JVC-усилитель amplifier.
*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*5 Обрежьте выводы задних динамиков
*4 Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект
для разъема ISO автомобиля и
поставки)
подсоедините их к усилителю.

D Connecting the external components / Подключение внешних устройств


CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Устройство автоматической смены компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, проигрыватель Apple iPod® или JVC D.
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Установите для внешнего входа значение “Changer” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22.)
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно, как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod*6 или D. можно подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит в комплект
поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для проигрывателя D.).
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Соединение 1 (интегрированное соединение)

Apple iPod (separately purchased)


Apple iPod (продается отдельно)

or CAUTION / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:
JVC CD changer или JVC D. player (separately purchased)
• Before connecting the external
JVC DAB tuner Проигрыватель Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)
нескольких компакт- components, make sure that the unit
Тюнер DAB JVC
дисков JVC is turned off.
• Перед подключением устройства
CD changer jack
автоматической смены
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
компакт-дисков, что приемник
отключен.

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Соединение 2 (альтернативное соединение)


*6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
Apple iPod (separately purchased) countries.
Apple iPod (продается отдельно) *6 iPod является торговоймаркой Apple
Computer, Inc., зарегистрированной в
США и других странах.

or *7 Connecting cord supplied for your CD


JVC CD changer JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC DAB tuner or или changer or DAB tuner
Проигрыватель Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)
Тюнер DAB JVC или нескольких компакт- *7 Подключение кабеля, входящего
дисков JVC в комплект поставки устройства
автоматической смены
CD changer jack компакт-дисков или тюнера DAB
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков

Other external component / Другое внешнее устройство


• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Установите для внешнего входа значение “Ext In” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22.)

External component
Внешнее устройство

CD changer jack External component


Разъем устройства
Внешнее устройство
автоматической смены
компакт-дисков *8 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
*8 Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в комплект
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
поставки)
Мини-разъем стерео-3,5

*9 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)


*9 Адаптер для подключения дополнительных устройств KS-U58
(не входит в комплект поставки)

Instal3-4_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 4 12/29/05 11:29:52 AM


ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER KD-G825

KD-G825

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0360-001A
[U/UH]

Cover_KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 2 12/23/05 11:15:43 AM


Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
ENGLISH

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS


1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit How to use the MODE/SEL button


If you use MODE or SEL (select), the display
and some controls (such as the number buttons,
4/¢ buttons, 5/∞ buttons, and the
control dial) enter the corresponding control
mode.
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after
pressing MODE, to operate the FM tuner.
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

“Please Eject” appears on the display.

Works as time countdown indicator.

• If this does not work, reset your unit. To use these controls for original functions
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects. again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
of these buttons until the control is cleared.
• Pressing MODE again also restores original
functions. However, pressing SEL makes the
unit enters a different mode.
Caution:
If the temperature inside the car is below 0°C, the movement of animation and text scroll will be
halted on the display to prevent the display from being blurred. appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, and the operating temperature is resumed, these functions will
start working again.
2

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 2 12/23/05 11:18:26 AM


How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with
CONTENTS

ENGLISH
the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in Control panel ................................... 4
“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............. 5
Getting started ................................. 6
Press briefly. Basic operations ................................................... 6
Radio operations .............................. 7
Press repeatedly. Disc/USB memory operations............. 9
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 9
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................ 9
Press either Playing a USB memory ......................................... 10
one.
Sound adjustments ........................... 14
Press and hold until your General settings — PSM ................... 16
desired response begins. Title assignment............................... 24
Press and hold both
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24
buttons at the same time. Other external component
operations .................................... 26
The following marks are used to indicate... More about this unit ......................... 27
: Built-in CD player operations.
Maintenance .................................... 31
: External CD changer operations. Troubleshooting ............................... 32
: External USB memory operations. Specifications ................................... 35

Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, For safety...
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as
involved in a traffic accident.
this will block outside sounds, making driving
dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any
Caution on volume setting: complicated operations.
Discs produce very little noise compared
with other sources. Lower the volume Temperature inside the car...
before playing a disc to avoid damaging If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
the speakers by the sudden increase of the or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
output level. the car becomes normal before operating the
unit.

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 3 12/23/05 11:18:29 AM


Control panel
ENGLISH

Parts identification

1 BAND button 7 EQ (equalizer) button


2 • Control dial 8 0 (eject) button
• (standby/on attenuator) button 9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
3 DISP (display) button p SRC (source) button
4 Remote sensor q (control panel release) button
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to w SEL (select) button
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial e MODE button
lighting). r Number buttons
5 Display window t 4/¢ buttons
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

How to detach/attach the control panel


Detaching... Attaching...

Lever CAUTION:
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while
the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back
into lock position before attaching the panel.

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 4 12/23/05 11:18:30 AM


Remote controller — RM-RK50

ENGLISH
Installing the lithium coin battery Main elements and features
(CR2025)

Aim the remote controller directly at the 1 (standby/on/attenuator) button


remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is • Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
no obstacle in between. attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning: 2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Do not install any battery other than • Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may • Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
explode. • Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
• Store the battery in a place where children USB.
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident. • While playing an MP3 disc on an
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, MP3-compatible CD changer:
cracking, or starting a fire: – Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, – Changes the folder if pressed and held.
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire. • While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
– Do not leave the battery with other JVC D. player:
metallic materials. – Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or D ∞.
similar tools. – Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
when throwing away or saving it. selecting buttons.)*
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
Caution: 4 SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (i-EQ: intelligent
equalizer).

* 5 U: Returns to the previous menu.


D ∞: Confirms the selection.

Continued on next page...


5

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 5 12/23/05 11:18:31 AM


5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons pages 14 – 16.)
ENGLISH

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.


• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held. To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player To restore the sound, press it
(in menu selecting mode): again.
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.) To turn off the power
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and
held.

Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
~ Turn on the power. 16 – 18.
1

Ÿ 2-1 Canceling the display


demonstrations
Turn the control dial to set “Demo/Link”
to “Off.”

2-2 Setting the clock


1 Press number button 4 ( ).
* You cannot select these sources if they “Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then,
are not ready or not connected. turn the control dial to adjust the
hour.
! For FM/AM tuner 2 Press ¢ to select “Clock Min”
(minute). Then, turn the control
dial to adjust the minute.
3 Press ¢ to select “24H/12H.”
⁄ Adjust the volume.
Then, turn the control dial to select
“12Hours” or “24Hours,” time
display mode.

3 Exit from the setting.

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 6 12/23/05 11:17:58 AM


To check the current clock time when the
power is turned off Radio operations

ENGLISH
~
Changing the display pattern
Ÿ
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
! Start searching for a station.

Source operation display


When a station is received, searching
stops.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast
with sufficient signal strength,
lights up on the display.
“SMALL” (CD jacket image) graphic*1 is displayed.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
*2
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed. 1

2 Select a desired station frequency.


Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 17).

Goes back to the initial display pattern.

*1 You can use your edited file for graphic screen When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
(see pages 19 – 22). receive
Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
1
a longer time to show it on the display.
*2 The information bar will disappear if no
operation is performed for five seconds.

Continued on next page...


7

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 7 12/23/05 11:18:01 AM


2 Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
ENGLISH

number 4 of the FM1 band.

Using the number buttons


3 Exit from the setting. 1

lights up on the display.


Reception improves, but stereo effect will 2
be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, select “Mono Off”
in step 2. goes off.

3
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting— Using the Preset Station List


SSM (Strong-station Sequential • When appears on the display, you can
Memory) move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you
want to store into.
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
• By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List
will appear (go to step 4 on page 9).
2
2

3 Select “SSM.”

3 Display the Preset Station List.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are


searched and stored automatically in the FM
band.

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 8 12/23/05 11:18:03 AM


4 Select the preset number you want to
store into. Disc/USB memory

ENGLISH
operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
• You can move to the lists of the other FM change the source or eject the disc.
bands by pressing number button 5
( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly.

5 Store the station.

To stop playback and eject the disc

Listening to a preset station


Using the number buttons
1 Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played
repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you
want to listen to. ~

or
* If you have changed the external input
setting to “Ext In” (see page 18), you
cannot select the CD changer.

Using the Preset Station List Ÿ Select a disc.


For disc number from 01 – 06:
1 Display the Preset Station List, then
select the preset station you want to
listen to.

2 Change to the selected station. For disc number from 07 – 12:

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 9 12/23/05 11:18:05 AM


Playing a USB memory Track and folder information (CD/CD Text/
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a MP3/WMA/USB)
ENGLISH

USB memory.
Once you insert a disc or attach a USB
All tracks in the USB memory will be played
memory, the total track number/total
repeatedly until you change the source.
playing time (for CD/CD Text) and total
• Removing the USB memory will also stop
folder number/total track number (for MP3/
playback.
WMA/USB) appears, then the following
~ information appears...

Ex.: When “CD-CH” is selected as the source

Current folder number*1


Current disc number*2 Elapsed playing time
File type*1*3 Current track number

Ÿ USB input terminal


• For the audio CD or CD Text:
Disc name*4 and Track name*5
• For the MP3/WMA/USB:
Folder name and File name, or
Album/performer*6 and Track name*6

USB memory • When playing CD changer, the total


numbers will not appear.
If a USB memory has been attached...
*1 Displayed only when an MP3/WMA
track is played back.
*2 Displayed only when “CD-CH” is selected
as the source.
*3 Either MP3 or WMA indicator lights up
depending on the detected file.
Playback starts from where it has been stopped
*4 Appears only for CD Texts and CDs if
previously.
it has been recorded or assigned. (“No
• If a different USB memory is currently
Name” appears if no name is recorded or
attached, playback starts from the beginning.
assigned.)
*5 Appears only for CD Texts. (“No Name”
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it
appears if no name is recorded.)
out from the unit.
*6 Appears only when “Tag” is set to “On”
(see page 18).
Cautions:
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might
hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all the important data has been
backed up to avoid losing the data.

10

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 10 12/23/05 11:18:06 AM


About MP3 and WMA tracks To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and MP3/WMA/USB)

ENGLISH
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

When an MP3/WMA folder in an MP3/


WMA disc includes an image <jtw> file
edited by Image Converter (Ver 3.0)—
supplied in the CD-ROM, you can show the For the main unit:
image on the display while the tracks in the • Holding either of the buttons can display the
folder are played back—Image Link. (See Folder List (see page 12).
pages 17 and 29 for details.) For CD changer:
• Holding either of the buttons can display the
Disc List (see page 12).
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
compatible CD changer with your unit. (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. These units, however, are not
compatible with MP3 discs. To select a number from 01 – 06:
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD
changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD To select a number from 07 – 12:
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text
compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track • To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/


USB, it is required that folders are assigned
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks To select a particular track in a folder (for


MP3/WMA/USB):

11

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 11 12/23/05 11:18:07 AM


Other main functions 5 Change to the selected item.
ENGLISH

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

• When appears on the display, you can • The list disappears and playback starts.
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
1
Only possible on JVC
2 Select “LIST.” MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks


within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track


whose number is a single digit (1 to 9).
3 Select the list type.

*1 Selectable only when the 2


source is “CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the
media is MP3, WMA, or
USB. Each time you press the button, you can
skip 10 tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be
• CD-CH (only for MP3): If you select the selected and vice versa.
current disc (highlighted on the display),
its Folder List appears.
• If you select the current folder 3
(highlighted on the display), its File List
appears.

4 Select an item.

EX.: When “File” is selected in step 3

• You can move to the other lists by


pressing number button 5 ( ) or
6( ) repeatedly.

12

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 12 12/28/05 7:10:14 PM


Prohibiting disc ejection 7 Repeat play
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

ENGLISH
• “No Eject” appears on the display. Mode Plays repeatedly
Track: The current track [ ].
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder
procedure. [ ].
• “Eject OK” appears on the display. Disc*2: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

Selecting the playback modes


7 Random play
You can use only one of the following playback
modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode. Mode Plays at random


7 Intro play Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on [ ].
Disc*3: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
All*4: All tracks of the inserted discs
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Mode Plays beginning 15 seconds of...
*1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/
Track: All tracks of the current disc or USB).
USB memory [ ]. *2 Only while playing discs in the CD
Folder*1: First tracks of all folders changer.
[ ]. *3 Only while playing a disc.
Disc*2: First tracks of all the inserted *4 Only while playing discs in the CD
discs [ ]. changer or playing a USB memory.
Off: Cancels.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

13

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 13 12/23/05 11:18:10 AM


2 Use 4/¢ to select a
Sound adjustments cutoff frequency to the subwoofer.
• 80Hz: Frequencies higher than
ENGLISH

80 Hz are cut off.


Adjusting the sound • 120Hz: Frequencies higher than
120 Hz are cut off.
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your • 160Hz: Frequencies higher than
preference. 160 Hz are cut off.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing 3 Turn the control dial to adjust the
number button 3. subwoofer output level. [0 to 8]

C VolAdjust
1 Turn the control dial to adjust the input
level of each source (except FM).
[–5 to +5]
2 Adjust to match the input level of the
FM sound level.
• Before making an adjustment, select a
source you want to adjust.

D Loudness
Turn the control dial to activate or
• For “EQ” setting, see the following.
deactivate the loudness to produce a
well-balanced sound at low volume
3 Adjust the selected setting item. levels. [Off or On]
A Fad/Bal (Fader/Balance)
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to 4 Exit from the setting.
move to the “Fad/Bal” adjustment
display.
2 Adjust the speaker output balance
by pressing:
5 / ∞: between the front and rear
speakers. [F06 to R06]
4/¢ :
Selecting preset sound modes
between the left and right (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
speakers. [L06 to R06]
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to
the music genre.
B Subwoofer
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to Available sound modes
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment
FLAT (No sound mode is applied), H.ROCK
display.
(Hard rock), R & B (Rhythm & blues),
POP, JAZZ, DANCE, COUNTRY, REGGAE,
CLASSIC, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3

14

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 14 12/23/05 11:16:49 AM


Storing your own sound modes Sound Range/selectable items
elements Low Mid High

ENGLISH
You can adjust the sound modes and store your
own adjustments in memory. Level –06 to –06 to –06 to
• When appears on the display, you can +06 +06 +06
move back to the previous display by pressing FREQ 60 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz
number button 3. (Frequency) 80 Hz 1 kHz 12.5kHz
100 Hz 1.5kHz 15 kHz
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
Q (Band Q1.0 Q0.5 Fix
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 14. Q2.0 Q1.25
• In step 2, select “EQ.”
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
2 Select a sound mode. frequency ranges.

6 Store the adjustments.

To display the rest

3 Select a frequency range.

4 Adjust the sound elements of the


selected frequency range.
1 Use 5 / ∞ to adjust the level.
2 Press number button 2 ( ),
then turn the control dial to select the
frequency.
3 Press number button 2 ( ), then
turn the control dial to select the band
width.

15

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 15 12/23/05 11:16:53 AM


The list below shows the preset value setting for each sound mode:
Preset values
ENGLISH

Sound Low Mid High


modes Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band
(Frequency) width) (Frequency) width) (Frequency) width)
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
H.ROCK +03 100 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
JAZZ +03 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz Fix
DANCE +04 60 Hz Q1.0 -02 1 kHz Q1.0 +01 10 kHz
COUNTRY +02 60 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.0 +02 12.5kHz
REGGAE +03 60 Hz Q1.25 +02 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 12.5kHz
CLASSIC +01 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz

General settings — PSM


Basic procedure 3 Select a PSM item.

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)


items listed in the table that follows.
• By pressing either of the buttons
repeatedly, you can also move to the item
1 of the other categories.

4 Adjust the selected PSM item.

An item previously selected appears on the


display.
2 Select a PSM category.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust other
PSM items if necessary.

6 Exit from the setting.


To display the rest

16

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 16 12/23/05 11:16:54 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Demo/Link Demo: [Initial]; Display demonstration will be

ENGLISH
Display activated automatically, [6].
demonstration Image Link: To show a still image while playing MP3/
WMA tracks, [11, 29].
Off: Cancels.
• Still image appears if no operation is done for about
MOVIE

20 seconds.
LevelMeter You can select the different level meter patterns.
Audio level meter Meter 1 [Initial] O Meter 2
• Press DISP repeatedly to show the selected level meter.
Pict Download: [Initial]; Download files, [19].
Pictures Set: Activate the stored files, [22]
Delete: Delete the stored files, [21].
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [6]
Hour adjustment [Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
CLOCK

Clock Min 00 – 59, [6]


Minute adjustment [Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
24H/12H 12Hours – 24Hours, [6]
Time display mode [Initial: 12Hours]
Scroll Once: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.
Scroll Auto: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals).
Off: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the
display regardless of the setting.
Dimmer Auto: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on
Dimmer the headlights.
Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Time Set: Set the timer for dimmer, [22].
DISPLAY

Any hour – Any hour


From – To*1: [Initial: 6PM – 7AM]
Contrast 1 – 10: [Initial: 5]; Adjust the display contrast to
Contrast make the display indications clear and
legible.
LCD Type Negative: [Initial]; Negative pattern of the display
Display type (except still images and animation).
Auto: Positive pattern will be selected during the
day time*2; while negative pattern will be
used during the night time*2.
Positive: Positive pattern of the display.
*1 Adjustable only when “Dimmer” is set to “Time Set.”
*2 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.

Continued on next page...


17

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 17 12/23/05 11:16:56 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Font Type You can select the font type used on the display.
ENGLISH

Font type 1 [Initial] O 2


DISPLAY

Tag On: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information display


Tag display while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].
Off: Cancels.
IF Band Auto: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to
Intermediate reduce interference noises between close
frequency filter stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
TUNER

Wide: Subject to the interference noises from


adjacent stations, but sound quality will
not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
Ext Input*3 Changer: [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [9], an
External input Apple iPod or a JVC D. player, [24].
Ext In: To use any other external component than
the above, [26].
Beep On: [Initial]; Activates the key-touch tone.
Key-touch tone Off: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
Telephone Muting1/Muting2: Select either one which mutes the
AUDIO

Telephone muting sounds while using a cellular phone.


Off: [Initial]; Cancels.
• If CD, CD changer, or USB has been selected as the source,
playback pauses during telephone muting.
Amp Gain You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Amplifier gain High PWR: [Initial]; Volume 00 – Volume 50
control Low PWR: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the
maximum power of the speaker is less than
50 W to prevent them from being damaged.)
Color Sel [Initial: All Source]; You can select your favorite display color
Color selection for each source (or for all sources), [22].
Color Set You can create your own colors, and select them for the
display color, [23].
COLOR

Day Color: User color during the day time*4.


NightColor: User color during the night time*4.
Red +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Green +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Blue +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
*3 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—TUNER, CD, or USB.
*4 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.

18

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 18 12/23/05 11:16:57 AM


• To download the file(s), see the following.
Graphic displays • To delete the file(s), see pages 20 and 21.
• To activate the file(s), see page 22.

ENGLISH
Before starting the following procedure,
prepare a CD-R including still images (pictures)
and animations (movies).
• With Image Converter (Ver 3.0) included in IMPORTANT:
the supplied CD-ROM, you can create and • Refer also to Image Converter PDF files
download your own images and animations. included in the “Manual” folder on the
(Samples are included in the CD-ROM.) supplied CD-ROM.
These images/animation will be shown during • Still images (pictures) and animations
playing a source. (movie) should have the following
• You can store “LARGE” or “SMALL” pictures extension code in their file names:
and movies. – jtl: for large size still images
Picture: 30 still images each – jtm: for small size still images
Movie: 60 frames each – jta: for large size animations
– jtb: for small size animations
Basic procedure – jtw: for Image Link (see pages 11 and 17)
• Before you download or delete the files,
• When appears on the display, you can observe the following:
move back to the previous display by pressing – Do not download a file while driving.
number button 3. – Do not turn off the ignition key of the car
• When / appears on the display, while downloading or deleting a file.*
you can move to the other lists by pressing – Do not detach the control panel while
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly. downloading or deleting a file.*
– Do not attach or detach a USB memory
1 Insert a CD-R or the supplied while downloading a file.*
CD-ROM. * If you do so, the file download or deletion
will not be done correctly.

2 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.


• In step 2, select “MOVIE.”
• In step 3, select “Pict.” Downloading pictures or an animation
• It takes a long time to download an
animation. For details, see page 30.
3 Select an item. • To activate the downloaded files, see page 22.

1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on left column.


• In step 3, select “Download.”

4 Select a picture size.

or

The display goes to the PICT menu.

Continued on next page...


19

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 19 12/23/05 11:16:58 AM


2 8 • To download more pictures from
the same folder, repeat steps 5 to 7.
ENGLISH

• To download more pictures from


another folder, press number button
3( ). Then, repeat steps 3 to 7.

9 Exit from the setting.

“File Check” flashes and then the Folder List


appears on the display. Deleting the files
Deleting the stored animation
3 Select a folder.
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

2
4 Display the File List.

5 Select a file.
EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
step 4 on page 19

3 Delete the animation.


6 Confirm the selection.

EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected 4 Exit from the setting.

7 Download the file.

20

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 20 12/23/05 11:17:00 AM


Deleting the stored pictures 4 Exit from the setting.
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.

ENGLISH
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

2 Deleting all the stored files


1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

The File List appears on the display.

3 • To delete one of the stored pictures


1 Use 5 / ∞ to select a file. Then, press
number button 1 ( ) to confirm EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
the selection. step 4 on page 19

3 Delete all the stored files.


EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete the selected file.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to delete more
pictures. 4 Exit from the setting.

• To delete all the stored pictures


1 Press number button 2 ( ).

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in step 4 on page


19
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete all the stored pictures.

21

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 21 12/23/05 11:17:01 AM


Activating the downloaded files
Setting the time for dimmer
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
ENGLISH

• When appears on the display, you can


• In step 3, select “Set.”
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
2 Select the display type.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.
• In step 2, select “DISPLAY.”
• In step 3, select “Dimmer.”

2 Select “Time Set.”

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in


step 4 on page 19 and “Movie”
is selected

Movie Your edited animation stored


in “Movie” is activated. \ Go 3 Adjust the dimmer time.
to step 3. 1 Turn the control dial to set the dimmer
Picture One of your edited still images time.
stored in “Picture” is activated. 2 Press ¢ to select “To.” Then, turn
\ Go to step 3. the control dial to set the dimmer end
Slideshow All stored still images are time.
activated and shown in
sequence (UserSlide). 4 Exit from the setting.
• If no still image is stored,
beeps sound.

3 Select a file.*

Changing the display color


You can select your favorite display color for
each source (or all sources).
The unit returns to the playback display.
• When appears on the display, you can
• To display the activated files, see page 7. move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
* If no still image or no animation is stored, you
can only select “Default.”

22

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 22 12/23/05 11:17:03 AM


Setting the display color 6 Exit from the setting.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.

ENGLISH
• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
• In step 3, select “Color Sel.”
Creating your own color—User Color
2 You can create your own colors—“Day Color”
or “NightColor.”

1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.


• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
3 Select a source. • In step 3, select “Color Set.”

2 Select “Day Color” or “NightColor.”

All Source*1 O CD O Changer (or Ext


In*2) O USB*3 O FM O AM O Ipod*3/
D.PLAYER*3 O (back to the beginning)

*1 When you select “All Source,” you can use


the same color for all the sources.
*2 Depends on the “Ext Input” setting, see
page 18.
*3 Displayed only when the target
component is connected.
3 Select a primary color.
4 Select a color.

4 Adjust the level (+00 to +11) of the


Every*4 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O Leaves selected primary color.
O Grass O Apple O Rose O Amber
O Honey O Violet O Grape O Pale O
User*5 O (back to the beginning)

*4 The color changes every 2 seconds.


*5 The user-edited colors—“Day Color” and
“NightColor” will be applied (see right 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
column for details). primary colors.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the color 6 Exit from the setting.
for each source (except when selecting
“All Source” in step 3).

23

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 23 12/23/05 11:17:04 AM


3 Assign a title.
Title assignment 1 Press number button 4 ( )
ENGLISH

repeatedly to select a character set.


You can assign titles to station frequencies, CDs
(both in the unit and the CD changer), and
external components (Ext In).

Maximum number of
Sources
characters
FM/AM tuner Up to 10 characters (up to 30 2 Turn the control dial to select a
station frequencies including character.
both FM and AM) • For available characters, see page 30.
CDs/CD-CH* Up to 32 characters (up to 3 Use 4/¢ to move to the next
30 discs) (or previous) character position.
External Up to 8 characters 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you finish
components entering the title.
* You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or MP3/
WMA/USB. 4 Store the title.

• When appears on the display, you can


move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.

1 Select the sources. To erase the entire title


• For FM/AM tuner: Tune into a station. In step 3 above...
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external components: Select “Ext In”
(see page 18).

2 Display the TITLE input screen.


iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:


Connect either one of the following (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of this unit.
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for
controlling an iPod.
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for
controlling a D. player.

24

EN24-27KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 24 12/23/05 11:17:19 AM


• For connection, see Installation/Connection To fast-forward or reverse the track
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

ENGLISH
with the interface adapter.

Caution: To go to the next or previous tracks

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the


vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Preparations: Selecting a track from the menu


Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external
input setting (see page 18). 1 Enter the main menu.

~
Now the 4/¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons.*

Ÿ 2 Select the desired menu.

Playback starts automatically from where For iPod:


it has been paused (for iPod) or stopped Playlists O Artists O Albums O Songs
(for D. player) previously. O Genres O Composers O (back to the
beginning)
! Adjust the volume.
For D. player:
Playlist O Artist O Album O Genre O
Track O (back to the beginning)

⁄ Adjust the sound mode as you want.


* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
(See pages 14 – 16.) – When you confirm the selection of a track.
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.

To pause (only for iPod) or stop (only for


D. player) playback

• To resume playback, press it again.


Continued on next page...
25

EN24-27KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 25 12/23/05 11:17:22 AM


3 Confirm the selection. 7 Random play
ENGLISH

To move back to the previous


menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts


automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 Mode Plays at random
until the desired track is played.
Song: Functions the same as “Shuffle
• Holding 4/¢ can skips 10
Songs” of the iPod [ ] or
items at a time.
“Random Play = On” of the
D. player [ ].
Album*: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Selecting the playback modes Albums” of the iPod [ ].
Off: Cancels.
1 * For iPod: Only if you select “All Albums”
in “Albums” of the main
“MENU.”
2 Select your desired playback mode.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
7 Repeat play pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

Other external component


operations
Mode Plays repeatedly You can connect an external component to
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line
One: Functions the same as “Repeat
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Mode = One” for the D. player
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
[ ].
Manual (separate volume).
All: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat
• For listening to the USB memory, see page 10.
Mode = All” for the D. player
• For listening to an iPod or a D. player, see
[ ].
pages 24 – 26.
Off: Cancels.

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 18


and select the external input (“Ext In”).

26

EN24-27KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 26 12/23/05 11:17:24 AM


Ÿ Turn on the connected component
Disc operations
and start playing the source. Caution for DualDisc playback

ENGLISH
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does
! Adjust the volume. not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.

General
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
pages 14 – 16.)
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),
MP3 and WMA formats.
More about this unit • If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same playback source
again, playback starts from where it has been
Basic operations stopped previously.
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also Inserting a disc
turn on the power. If the source is ready, • When a disc is inserted upside down, “Please
playback also starts. Eject” appears on the display. Press 0 to eject
the disc.
Turning off the power • Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and
• If you turn off the power while listening to a unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into
disc, disc play will start from where playback the loading slot.
has been stopped previously, next time you
turn on the power. Playing a disc
– For MP3/WMA disc: Disc play will start • While playing an audio CD: If a title has been
from the first track of the current folder if assigned to the audio CD (see page 24), it will
a <jtw> file is included and Image Link is be shown on the display.
activated (see page 17). • While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent
Tuner operations sounds.
Storing stations in memory
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and • Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
stations are stored newly. • This unit can play back only files of the same
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest type which are first detected if a disc includes
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency). both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
– When SSM is over, the station stored in WMA files.
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in. • This unit can play back multi-session discs;
• When storing a station manually, the however, unclosed sessions will be skipped
previously preset station is erased when a new while playing.
station is stored in the same preset number.

Continued on next page...


27

EN24-27KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 27 12/23/05 11:17:25 AM


• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played • The maximum number of characters for file/
back on this unit because of their disc folder names vary among the disc format used
characteristics, or for the following reasons: (includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
ENGLISH

– Discs are dirty or scratched. <.wma>).


– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens – ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
inside the unit. – ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty. – Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are – Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters
written with “Packet Write” method. – Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)
– There are improper recording conditions characters
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions * The parenthetic figure is the maximum
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.). number of characters for file/folder names in
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time case the total number of files and folders is
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than 313 or more.
that of regular CDs. • This unit can play back files recorded in VBR
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs: (variable bit rate).
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy
seal stuck to the surface. in elapsed time display, and do not show
– Discs on which labels can be directly the actual elapsed time. Especially, after
printed by an ink jet printer. performing the search function, this
Using these discs under high temperatures or difference becomes noticeable.
high humidities may cause malfunctions or • This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
damage to the unit. 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
Playing an MP3/WMA disc – MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
format.
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
• This unit can show the names of albums,
– WMA files encoded with lossless,
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,
professional, and voice format.
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA
– WMA files which are not based upon
files.
Windows Media® Audio.
• This unit can display only one-byte
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
characters. No other characters can be
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
correctly displayed.
ATRAC3, etc.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
• The search function works but search speed is
meeting the conditions below:
not constant.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

28

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 28 12/23/05 11:17:39 AM


Playing MP3/WMA track from a USB memory Image Link
• While playing from a USB memory, the • Image Link will not work in the following

ENGLISH
playback order may differ from other players. cases:
• This unit may be unable to play back some – If no <jtw> file is included in an MP3/
USB memories or some files due to their WMA folder.
characteristics or recording conditions. – If Intro play is activated.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories – If the source is changed to another from
and connection ports, some USB memories “CD.”
may not be attached properly or the • If more than one <jtw> file are included in a
connection might be loose. folder, a file with the youngest file number is
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory used for Image Link.
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from
pressing the 0 button. Ejecting a disc
• If the connected USB memory does not have
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
the correct files, “No Files” appears and the
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted
unit returns to the previous source.
again into the loading slot to protect it from
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
dust. (Disc will not be played this time.)
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
meeting the conditions below: Sound adjustment
– Bit rate: General
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)
fader level to the center (“00”).
WMA: 5 kbps — 320 kbps
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a
– Sampling frequency:
subwoofer is connected.
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1)
• You cannot change the input level—
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If you try to
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
adjust it for FM, “Fix” will appear.
(MPEG-2.5)
WMA: 8 kHz — 48 kHz
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in Graphic display
VBR (variable bit rate). General
• The maximum number of characters for • You can display two sizes of pictures and
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 animations.
characters for MP3/WMA tag information. – LARGE: <jtl> for still pictures and <jta> for
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files the animations;
and 250 folders (999 files per folder). The image is displayed with the
dimension of the screen.
– SMALL: <jtm> for still pictures and <jtb>
for animations;
The image is displayed like a
CD jacket (on the left side of the
display).
• Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
longer time to show it on the display.

Continued on next page...


29

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 29 12/23/05 11:17:42 AM


Downloading (or deleting) files Title assignment
• You can download a file only while selecting • If you try to assign titles to more than 30
ENGLISH

“CD” for the playback source; on the other station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name
hand, you can delete a file while selecting any Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before
source. assignment.
• After finishing the procedure to download a • Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can
file, playback starts from the beginning. also be shown if you play back the disc from
• If you have already downloaded an animation, the unit and vice versa.
downloading a new animation deletes the
previously stored animation. Available characters on the display
• It takes a long time to download an
Capital letters
animation.
– About 3 to 4 seconds for a still image (one
frame).
– About 1 to 2 minutes for an animation of 30
Small letters
frames.
– About 3 minutes for an animation of 60
frames.
• If you try to operate the downloading
Numbers and symbols
procedure from a disc without any <jtl>,
<jtm>, <jta>, and <jtb> files, beeps sound.
• If you try to store more than 30 images
for each size “LARGE” and “SMALL,”
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start
downloading. Delete unwanted files before iPod or D. player operations
downloading. • When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
• If the total frame number of an animation D. player is charged through this unit.
downloaded exceeds 60, the frames exceeding • While the iPod or D. player is connected, all
that number are ignored. operations from the iPod or D. player are
disabled. Perform all operations from this
General settings—PSM unit.
• The text information may not be displayed
• “Auto” setting for “Dimmer” may not work
correctly.
correctly on some vehicles, particularly on
– Some characters such as accented letters
those having a control dial for dimming. In
cannot be shown correctly on the display.
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any
– Depends on the condition of
other than “Auto.”
communication between the iPod or
• If “LCD Type” is set to “Auto,” the display
D. player and the unit.
pattern will change to the “Positive” or
• If the text information includes more than
“Negative” pattern depending on the
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
“Dimmer” setting.
also page 17). This unit can display up to 40
• Changing the “Amp Gain” setting from
characters.
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” when the level
is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit
automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”

30

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 30 12/23/05 11:17:43 AM


Notice: How to handle discs
When operating an iPod or D. player, When removing a disc from Center holder

ENGLISH
some operations may not be performed its case, press down the center
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the holder of the case and lift the disc
following JVC web site: out, holding it by the edges.
For iPod users: • Always hold the disc by the
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
ks-pd100/index.html> When storing a disc into its case, gently insert
For D. player users: the disc around the center holder (with the
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ printed surface facing up).
ks-pd500/index.html> • Make sure to store discs into the cases after
use.

To keep discs clean


A dirty disc may not play correctly.
Maintenance If a disc does become dirty, wipe it
with a soft cloth in a straight line
from center to edge.
How to clean the connectors • Do not use any solvent (for example,
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
connectors. benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to
To play new discs
damage the connectors. New discs may have some rough
spots around the inner and outer
edges. If such a disc is used, this
unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Connector
Do not use the following discs:

Moisture condensation Warped disc


Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car. Sticker Sticker residue
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until Stick-on label
the moisture evaporates.

31

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 31 12/23/05 11:17:44 AM


Troubleshooting
ENGLISH

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service
center.

Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
speakers. • Check the cords and connections.
General

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• “Connect Error” appears on the Remove the control panel, wipe the connector,
display. then attach it again (see page 2).
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually.
FM/AM

work.
• Static noise while listening to the Connect the antenna firmly.
radio.
• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
back. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot which you used for recording.
be skipped.
Disc playback

• Disc can be neither played back nor • Unlock the disc (see page 13).
ejected. • Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
Disc,” “Loading Error,” or “Eject
Error” flashes).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
MP3/WMA playback

the file names.


• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
(“File Check” keeps flashing on the
display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are
you have intended them to play. recorded.

32

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 32 12/23/05 11:17:45 AM


Symptoms Remedies/Causes

ENGLISH
• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs while playing. This is
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
MP3/WMA playback

• “Not Support” appears on the display Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate
and track skips. format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA
track.
• “NO MUSIC” appears on the display. Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 30).
• Noise is generated. The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the • Readout time varies depending on the USB
display. memory.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Attach a USB memory that contains tracks
encoded in an appropriate format.
USB memory playback

• “Not Support” appears on the display The track is unplayable.


and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, • The attached USB memory may be
then returns to the previous source. malfunctioning, or may not have been
formatted correctly.
The files included in the USB memory are
corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory
repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the
display.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 30).
• While playing a track, sound is MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied
sometimes interrupted. into the USB memory.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB
memory, and try again.
CD changer

• “No Disc” appears on the display. Insert a disc into the magazine.
• “No Magazine” appears on the Insert the magazine.
display.

Continued on next page...


33

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 33 12/23/05 11:17:46 AM


Symptoms Remedies/Causes
ENGLISH

• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly
CD changer

and press the reset button of the CD changer.


• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Press the reset button of the CD changer.
the display.
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• Download does not seem to finish. It takes quite a long time to download an
animation with many frames (see page 30).
• Animation does not move. Wait until the operating temperature resumes.
PICT—PSM

• The display graphic function does


not work correctly.
• You cannot select an image or Select an image only after downloading the
animation for “Set” in “Pict.” appropriate files in memory.
(“Default” cannot be changed for
“Movie” and “Picture, ” or beeps
sound for “Slideshow.”)
• The iPod or D. player does not turn • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
on or does not work. • Update the firmware version.
• Change the battery.
• Buttons do not work as intended. The functions of the buttons have been changed.
Press MODE before performing the operation.
• The sound is distorted. Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the
iPod/D. player.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display. Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Playback stops. The headphones are disconnected during
iPod/D. player playback

playback. Restart the playback operation using


the control panel (see page 25).
• No sound can be heard when Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard. Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,
• “Error 01” appears on the display connect it again.
when connecting a D. player.
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK” No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or
appears on the display. D. player.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and
the display. iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Check the connection between the adapter and
this unit.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.
not work after disconnecting from
this unit.

34

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 34 12/23/05 11:17:46 AM


Specifications

ENGLISH
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION
Maximum Power Output: Type: Compact disc player
Front: 50 W per channel Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical
Rear: 50 W per channel pickup (semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS): Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% Dynamic Range: 96 dB
total harmonic distortion. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% MP3 Decoding Format:
total harmonic distortion. MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Tone Control Range: WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding
Low: ±12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, Format:
200 Hz) Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Mid: ±12 dB (500 Hz, 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz, Playable USB memory:
2.5 kHz) Format: FAT 12/16/32
High: ±12 dB (10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
17.5 kHz) Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Max. Current: Less than 500 mA
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Line-Out Level/Impedance: GENERAL
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Power Requirement:
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Operating Voltage:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Grounding System: Negative ground
Other Terminal: CD changer
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
TUNER SECTION Dimensions (W × H × D):
Frequency Range: Installation Size (approx.):
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz 182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
[FM Tuner] Mass (approx.):
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
without notice.
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
[AM Tuner] registered trademarks or trademarks of
Sensitivity: 20 μV Microsoft Corporation in the United States
Selectivity: 35 dB and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.

35

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 35 12/23/05 11:17:47 AM


Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN, TH
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0106DTSMDTJEIN

Rear_KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 2 12/23/05 11:18:45 AM


KD-G825
Installation/Connection Manual
°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß/§ŸË¡◊Õ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß
GET0360-006A 0106DTSMDTJEIN
[U/UH] EN, TH
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

ENGLISH ‰∑¬
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ȉ¥È√—∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æ◊ËÕ„™Èß“π°—∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øøÈ“ “¬¥‘π¢—È«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑Ï À“°√∂¬πµÏ¢Õߧÿ≥‰¡Ë‰
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers. ¥È„™È√–∫∫π’È µÈÕß„™È‡§√◊ËÕß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™Ë«¬ ´÷Ëß “¡“√∂À“´◊ÈÕ‰¥È®“°√È“π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC

WARNINGS §”‡µ◊Õπ
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π°“√‡°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√ ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȪ≈¥¢—È«·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë≈∫ÕÕ° ·≈È«®÷ßµËÕ “¬‰ø°ËÕ𵑥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕß
electrical connections before installing the unit. • µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“‰¥È‡¥‘𠓬¥‘πµËÕ√–À«Ë“߇§√◊ËÕß°—∫µ—«∂—ß √∂¬πµÏ„À¡Ë·≈È«À≈—ß®“°µ‘¥µ—Èß
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
À¡“¬‡Àµÿ:
Notes: • „™Èæ‘°—¥®”‡æ“–·∑πøî«  À“°øϢ“¥∫ËÕ¬ „ÀȪ√÷°…“√È“ π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio • ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȵËÕ≈”‚æß ∑’Ë¡’°”≈—ߢ—∫ ß ÿ¥‡°‘π°«Ë“ 50 W (∑—ÈߥȓπÀπÈ“·≈–¥È“πÀ≈—ß ¡’§Ë“§«“¡µÈ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂÷ß 8 Ω)
dealer. ∂È“°”≈—ߢ—∫µË”°«Ë“ 50 W „Àȇª≈’ˬπ§Ë“ “Amp Gain” ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π‰¡Ë„ÀÈ≈”‚æß™”√ÿ¥ (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 18 §”·π–π”)
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear
• °“√ªÈÕß°—π°“√≈—¥«ß®√ ®–µÈÕßæ—π¢—È« “¬µ–°—Ë« ∑’ˉ¡Ë„™È·≈È«¥È«¬‡∑ ªæ—𠓬‰ø
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change
• ·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ®–√ÈÕπ¡“°À≈—ß®“°„™È √–¡—¥√–«—ßլ˓‰ª  —¡º— ‡¡◊ËÕ∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink
·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: ¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß ”À√—∫°“√µËÕ·À≈Ë߮˓¬°”≈—ß·≈–≈”‚æß:


• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit • լ˓µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢È“°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµÏ ¡‘©–π—Èπ ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥È√—∫§«“¡‡ ’¬À“¬¡“°
will be seriously damaged. • °ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢È“°—∫≈”‚æß „Àȵ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥‘𠓬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧÿ≥„Àȇ√’¬∫√ÈÕ¬‡ ’¬°ËÕπ
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.

Parts list for installation and connection √“¬°“√ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√—∫µ‘¥µ—Èß·≈–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—π


The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  Ë«πª√–°Õ∫µËÕ‰ªπ’È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È À“°¡’ ‘Ëß„¥‰¡Ë§√∫ °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“µ—«·∑π®”ÀπË“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ßµ‘¥√∂¬πµÏ‚¥¬∑—π∑’
immediately.

A/B C D
Hard case/Control panel Sleeve Trim plate
≈—ß∫√√®ÿ/ÀπÈ“ª—¥ ª≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡ ·ºËπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µËß

E F G H
Power cord Washer (ø5) Lock nut (M5) Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)
“¬‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ß ª√–‡°Áπ«ß·À«π (ø5) πÕµ≈ÁÕ§ (M5)  ≈—°µ‘¥ (M5 × 20 ¡¡.)

I J K L M
Rubber cushion Handles Remote controller Battery CD-ROM
¬“ß°—π°√–·∑° §—π∫—ߧ—∫ √’‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈ ·∫µ‡µÕ√ (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
·ºËπ CD-ROM
(‚ª√·°√¡ Image Converter:Ver 3.0)

KD-G825_006A.indd 1 12/19/05 2:20:47 PM


INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING) °“√µ‘¥µ—Èß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπÈ“ª—∑¡Ï‡¢È“)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information ¿“æµ—«Õ¬Ë“ßµËÕ‰ªπ’È· ¥ß∂÷ß°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß·∫∫∑—Ë«‰ª À“°§ÿ≥¡’ª—≠À“À√◊ÕµÈÕß°“√¢ÈÕ¡Ÿ≈‡°’ˬ«°—∫™ÿ¥µ‘¥µ—Èß °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“°—∫ºŸÈ¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC ¢Õß∑Ë“πÀ√◊Õ∫√‘…—
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂È“§ÿ≥‰¡Ë·πË„®«Ë“µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë „ÀÈÀ“™Ë“ߺŸÈ‡™’ˬ«™“≠‡ªÁπºŸÈµ‘¥µ—Èß

Do the required electrical connections.


µËÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑’Ë°”À𥉫È∑—ÈßÀ¡¥

*1 When you stand the unit, be


careful not to damage the fuse
on the rear.
*1 ‡¡◊ËÕ§ÿ≥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫¢÷Èπ √–«—ßլ˓
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
∑”„ÀÈø‘« Ï∫√‘‡«≥ Ë«π∑È“¬‡ ’¬À“¬ sleeve firmly in place.
ßÕ·ºËπ‡æ◊ËÕ¬÷¥ª≈Õ°„ÀȵËÕ°—π‡¢È“∑’Ë

Removing the unit °“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫


Before removing the unit, release the rear section. °ËÕπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „ÀȪ≈¥ÀπÈ“µ—¥ Ë«π∑È“¬°ËÕπ

Insert the two handles, then pull them as


illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
„ Ë§—π∫—ߧ—∫ 2 Õ—π≈ß„π√ËÕß ”À√—∫„™Èæ—π≈«¥ ¥—ß¿“æ ®“°π—Èπ
„Àȇ≈◊ËÕπ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ° „π¢≥–∑’˧ËÕ¬ Ê ¥÷ߧ—π∫—ߧ—∫∑—Èß  Õß
Õ—πÕÕ°®“°°—π

When using the optional stay / ‡¡◊ËÕ„™Èµ—«¬÷¥·∫∫‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡Ë„™Èª≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall
ºπ—ß°—π‰ø Stay (option) µ—«Õ¬Ë“߇™Ëπ „π√∂¬πµÏ‚µ‚¬µÈ“ „ÀÈ∂Õ¥«‘∑¬ÿµ‘¥√∂¬πµÏÕÕ°°ËÕπ ·≈ô«®÷ßµ‘¥µíô߇§√◊ËÕßπ’ô‡¢ô“·∑π∑’Ë
µ—«¬÷¥ (‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2 *2 Not supplied for this unit.
°√ŸÀ—«‡√’¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡. )*2 *2 ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È
Dashboard
·ºßÀπÈ“ª—∑¡á Bracket*2

Screw (option)
·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫*2
°√Ÿ (‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È) Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√ŸÀ—«‡√’¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2
Pocket
°–‡ª“–
Bracket*2
·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫*2

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑’Ë¡ÿ¡µË”°«Ë“ 30˚ Õß»“
À¡“¬‡Àµ : ‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫‰«È „ÀÈ„™È °√Ÿ¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂È“„™È °√Ÿ¬“«°«Ë“π’ÈÕ“®∑”„ÀÈ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥ô

TROUBLESHOOTING °“√µ√«® Õ∫ª—≠À“¢—¥¢ÈÕß
• The fuse blows. • ø‘« Ï¢“¥
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * ¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’¥”·≈– ’·¥ßլ˓ß∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• Power cannot be turned on. • ‰¡Ë “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥È
* Is the yellow lead connected? * ¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’‡À≈◊ÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• No sound from the speakers. • ‰¡Ë¡’‡ ’¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? *  “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• Sound is distorted.
• ‡ ’¬ß‡æ’Ȭπ
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
*  “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
*  “¬¢—È«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬·≈–¢«“µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords? • ‡ ’¬ß√∫°«π
* ¡’°“√„™È “¬ —ÈπÊ À√◊ÕÀπ“Ê µËÕ®“°‡§√◊ËÕß «π∑’˵‘¥µ—Èß ‰«È∫πæ◊Èπ¥È“πÀ≈—ß°—∫µ—«∂—ß√∂¬πµÏÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• This unit become hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? • ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√ÈÕπ¢÷Èπ
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? *  “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
*  “¬¢—È«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬·≈–¢«“µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• This unit does nos work at all.
* Have you reset your unit? • ‡§√◊ËÕß√—∫π’È∑”ß“π‰¡
* ∑Ë“π‰¥Èµ—È߇§√◊ËÕß„À¡Ë·≈È«À√◊Õ¬—ß
2

KD-G825_006A.indd 2 12/19/05 2:20:57 PM


ENGLISH ‰∑¬

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS °“√‡™◊ËÕ¡‚¥¬„™È ‰øøÈ“


A Typical connections / °“√‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ·∫∫ª°µ

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious °ËÕ•∑”°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥‘•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÏլ˓ߕ–¡—¥•–«—լ˓„ÀȺ‘¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ™ÿ¥ª•–°Õ•™ÿ¥•’
damage to this unit. °“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕº‘¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„Àȇ°‘¥§«“¡‡†’¬À“¬•È“¬·•ß°—•™ÿ¥ª•–
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color. °Õ••’ȉ¥È“•µ–°—Ë«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕÿª°••ÏµËÕ‡™•ËÕ¡®“°µ—«• ß••Õ“®¡’’ ∑’ˉ¡Ë‡À¡•Õ•°—
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below. 1 µËÕ “¬‰ø ’µ“¡≈”¥—∫∑’Ë√–∫ÿ„π√Ÿª¥È“π≈Ë“ß
2 Connect the antenna cord. 2 ‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫“¬Õ“°“»
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit. 3  ÿ¥∑È“¬ µËÕ Ë«π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥‘𠓬‰ø‡¢È“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π’È

Antenna Connector
To subwoofer (see diagram )
∑’˵ËÕ ”À√—∫ “¬Õ“°“»
™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√Ï(¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )

15 A fuse
ø‘« Ï¢π“¥ 15 A
*1 Not supplied for this unit. Ignition switch
*1 ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È «‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥
Rear ground terminal
®ÿ¥‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ “¬¥‘π¥È“πÀ≈—ß

Line out (see diagram ) Black


“¬ÕÕ° (¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )  ’¥” To metallic body or chassis of the car
µËÕ°—∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√◊Õ‡™ ´‘ ¢Õß√∂¬πµá
To CD changer or another external component (see diagram )
™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õ߇§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ´’¥ CD ≈À–Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )
Yellow *2 To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
 ’‡À≈◊Õß *2 (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
µËÕ°—∫¢—È«∑’Ë¡’°√–· ‰øøÈ“„π·ºßø‘« Ï ´÷ËßµËÕ°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµ
(‚¥¬‰¡ËµÈÕß„™È «‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥) (12 ‚«≈∑ϧß∑’Ë)

Fuse block
Red ·ºßø‘« 
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise  ’·¥ß To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
power cannot be turned on. µËÕ°—∫¢—È« Ë«πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø‘«
*2 °ËÕπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È°ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µ‘¥µ—Èß
µÈÕßµËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«π’È°ËÕπ ¡‘©–π—Èπ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥

Blue
»’øÈ“ To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øøÈ“Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘ À“°¡’ (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 250 mA)

Blue with white stripe


 ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“« To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫Õª°√≥ÏÕË◊π (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 200 mA)

Orange with white stripe


 ’ È¡·∂∫¢“« To car light control switch
 «‘µ´Ï§«∫§ÿ¡‰ø¢Õß√∂¬πµ√Ï

Brown
 ’πÈ”µ“≈ To cellular phone system
µËÕ°—∫‚∑√»—æ∑χ§≈◊ËÕπ∑’Ë

White with black stripe White Gray with black stripe Gray Green with black stripe Green Purple with black stripe Purple
 ’¢“«·∂∫¥”  ’¢“«  ’‡∑“·∂∫¥”  ’‡∑“  ’‡¢’¬«·∂∫¥”  ’‡¢’¬«  ’¡Ë«ß·∂∫¥”  ’¡Ë«ß

Left speaker (front) Right speaker (front) Left speaker (rear) Right speaker (rear)
≈”‚æß´È“¬ (ÀπÈ“) ≈”‚æߢ«“ (ÀπÈ“) ≈”‚æß´È“¬ (À≈—ß) ≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈—ß)

KD-G825_006A.indd 3 12/23/05 4:21:31 PM


B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / µËÕ·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï·≈–/À√◊Õ´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√ϥȓππÕ°
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system. §ÿ≥ “¡“√∂µËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï ‰¥ÈÀ≈“¬µ—«‡æ◊ËÕ‡æ‘Ë¡§ÿ≥¿“懠’¬ß„ÀÈ°—∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‘‚Õ„π√∂¬πµÏ
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
• µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«√–¬–‰°≈ ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢È“°—∫ “¬µ–°—Ë«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊Ëπ Ê ‡æ◊ËÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker °Õ∫π’ȉ¥È
leads of this unit unused. • ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È ·≈È«µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬ ∑‘Èß “¬µ–°—Ë«≈”‚æߢÕß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ȉ«È
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this – ≈—≠≠“≥ÕÕ°®“°‡§√◊ËÕß®–¬—ߧßÕ¬ŸË„π√–¥—∫≈Ÿß ‡æ◊ËÕ„Àȇ≈’¬ß∑’ˉ¥È‡ªÁπ‡≈’¬ß‰Œ-‰ø
unit. ‡¡◊ËÕµËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ° „ÀȪ‘¥ªÿË¡§«∫§ÿ¡Õ—µ√“¢¬“¬ ∑’Ë·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ°
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the ‡æ◊ËÕ„Àȇ§√◊ËÕß¡’ª√– ‘∑∏‘¿“æ°“√∑”ß“π Ÿß ÿ¥È
external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)


¢ÈÕµËÕ√Ÿªµ—« Y (‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
Remote lead
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°•
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe) µËÕ “¬°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊ËπÀ√◊Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘∂È“¡’
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°• ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«)

Rear speakers
≈”‚æßÀ≈—ß
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplifier ‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡ ’¬ß JVC
‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡ ’¬ß JVC Subwoofer
´—∫«Ÿ‡øÕ√

Front speakers *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to
Front speakers
≈”‚æßÀπÈ“ the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
≈”‚æßÀπÈ“ (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching
the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

JVC Amplifier *3 µËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π„ÀÈ·πËπ‡¢È“°—∫µ—«∂—߇À≈Á° À√◊Õµ—«∂—ß√∂


‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡ ’¬ß JVC µ√ß Ë«π∑’ˉ¡Ë¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫ (À“°¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫Õ¬ŸË „ÀÈ¢Ÿ¥ ’ÕÕ°°ËÕπ
*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit) °ËÕπµËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π) À“°‰¡ËªØ‘∫—µ‘µ“¡§”·π–π”π’È
*4 “¬‡§‡∫‘≈ —≠≠“≥ (‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È) ‡§√◊ËÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥ À√◊Õ‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥È

C Connecting the external components / °“√µËÕ‡æ‘Ë¡‡µ‘¡‡¢È“°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊ËπÊ

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD ‡™π‡®Õ√Ï, Apple iPod® À√◊Õ‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ JVC D.
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / µ—Èߧ˓ “Changer” ‡ªìπ°“√§Ë“√—∫ —≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 18 §”·π–π”)
You can connect these components as illustrated below.
The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
∑Ë“π “¡“√∂µËÕÕÿª°√≥Ï¥—ß°≈Ë“«µ“¡¿“æ· ¥ß¥È“π≈Ë“ß
∑Ë“π “¡“√∂‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ iPod*5 À√◊Õ‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ D. ‚¥¬„™ÈÕπ‘ ‡∑Õ√χø Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï (‰¡Ë¡’¡“„ÀÈ)—KS-PD100 ( ”À√—∫ iPod) À√◊Õ KS-PD500 ( ”À√—∫‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ D.)

CAUTION / ¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß:
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
• °ËÕπ®–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° °√ÿ≥“µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“ªî¥‡§√◊ËÕßÕ¬ŸË
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (·¬°®”ÀπË“¬)

or
À√◊Õ JVC D. player (separately purchased)
‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ JVC D. (·¬°®”ÀπË“¬)

JVC CD changer
JVC CD ‡™π‡®Õ√Ï

CD changer jack
™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß
*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. *6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer
‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ CD
*5 iPod ‡ªÁπ‡§√◊ËÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§È“¢Õß Apple Computer, Inc. ´÷Ëß®¥∑–‡∫’¬π°“√§È“„πª√–‡∑» À√—∞Õ‡¡√‘°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»Õ◊ËπÊ *6 µËÕ “¬∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“ ”À√—∫ CD ‡™π‡®Õ√Ï

Other external component / Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°Õ◊ËπÊ


• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / µ—Èߧ˓ “Ext In” ‡∫ªìπ°“√§Ë“√—∫ —≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 18 §”·π–π”)

External component
Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°

CD changer jack External component


™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°
‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ CD *7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
*7 Õ·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï “¬ —≠≠“≥‡¢È“ KS-U57 (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug


*8 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
¢—È«‡ ’¬∫¡‘π‘ ‡µÕ√‘‚Õ¢π“¥ 3.5 ¡¡. *8 Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï√—∫ —≠≠“≥ AUX √ÿËπ KS-U58 (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)

KD-G825_006A.indd 4 12/19/05 2:21:00 PM


INDONESIA ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER KD-G825

ALAT PENERIMA CD KD-G825

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.


Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.


Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.

INSTRUCTIONS
BUKU PETUNJUK
GET0360-004A
[UN]

Cover_KD-G825_004A_1.indd 2 15/12/05 5:30:14 pm


Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
ENGLISH

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS


1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit How to use the MODE/SEL button


If you use MODE or SEL (select), the display
and some controls (such as the number buttons,
4/¢ buttons, 5/∞ buttons, and the
control dial) enter the corresponding control
mode.
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after
pressing MODE, to operate the FM tuner.
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

“Please Eject” appears on the display.

Works as time countdown indicator.

• If this does not work, reset your unit. To use these controls for original functions
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects. again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
of these buttons until the control is cleared.
• Pressing MODE again also restores original
functions. However, pressing SEL makes the
unit enters a different mode.
Caution:
If the temperature inside the car is below 0°C, the movement of animation and text scroll will be
halted on the display to prevent the display from being blurred. appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, and the operating temperature is resumed, these functions will
start working again.
2

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 2 12/23/05 11:18:26 AM


How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with
CONTENTS

ENGLISH
the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in Control panel ................................... 4
“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............. 5
Getting started ................................. 6
Press briefly. Basic operations ................................................... 6
Radio operations .............................. 7
Press repeatedly. Disc/USB memory operations............. 9
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 9
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................ 9
Press either Playing a USB memory ......................................... 10
one.
Sound adjustments ........................... 14
Press and hold until your General settings — PSM ................... 16
desired response begins. Title assignment............................... 24
Press and hold both
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24
buttons at the same time. Other external component
operations .................................... 26
The following marks are used to indicate... More about this unit ......................... 27
: Built-in CD player operations.
Maintenance .................................... 31
: External CD changer operations. Troubleshooting ............................... 32
: External USB memory operations. Specifications ................................... 35

Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, For safety...
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as
involved in a traffic accident.
this will block outside sounds, making driving
dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any
Caution on volume setting: complicated operations.
Discs produce very little noise compared
with other sources. Lower the volume Temperature inside the car...
before playing a disc to avoid damaging If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
the speakers by the sudden increase of the or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
output level. the car becomes normal before operating the
unit.

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 3 12/23/05 11:18:29 AM


Control panel
ENGLISH

Parts identification

1 BAND button 7 EQ (equalizer) button


2 • Control dial 8 0 (eject) button
• (standby/on attenuator) button 9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
3 DISP (display) button p SRC (source) button
4 Remote sensor q (control panel release) button
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to w SEL (select) button
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial e MODE button
lighting). r Number buttons
5 Display window t 4/¢ buttons
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

How to detach/attach the control panel


Detaching... Attaching...

Lever CAUTION:
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while
the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back
into lock position before attaching the panel.

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 4 12/23/05 11:18:30 AM


Remote controller — RM-RK50

ENGLISH
Installing the lithium coin battery Main elements and features
(CR2025)

Aim the remote controller directly at the 1 (standby/on/attenuator) button


remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is • Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
no obstacle in between. attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning: 2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Do not install any battery other than • Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may • Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
explode. • Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
• Store the battery in a place where children USB.
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident. • While playing an MP3 disc on an
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, MP3-compatible CD changer:
cracking, or starting a fire: – Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, – Changes the folder if pressed and held.
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire. • While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
– Do not leave the battery with other JVC D. player:
metallic materials. – Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or D ∞.
similar tools. – Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
when throwing away or saving it. selecting buttons.)*
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
Caution: 4 SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (i-EQ: intelligent
equalizer).

* 5 U: Returns to the previous menu.


D ∞: Confirms the selection.

Continued on next page...


5

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 5 12/23/05 11:18:31 AM


5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons pages 14 – 16.)
ENGLISH

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.


• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held. To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player To restore the sound, press it
(in menu selecting mode): again.
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.) To turn off the power
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and
held.

Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
~ Turn on the power. 16 – 18.
1

Ÿ 2-1 Canceling the display


demonstrations
Turn the control dial to set “Demo/Link”
to “Off.”

2-2 Setting the clock


1 Press number button 4 ( ).
* You cannot select these sources if they “Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then,
are not ready or not connected. turn the control dial to adjust the
hour.
! For FM/AM tuner 2 Press ¢ to select “Clock Min”
(minute). Then, turn the control
dial to adjust the minute.
3 Press ¢ to select “24H/12H.”
⁄ Adjust the volume.
Then, turn the control dial to select
“12Hours” or “24Hours,” time
display mode.

3 Exit from the setting.

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 6 12/23/05 11:17:58 AM


To check the current clock time when the
power is turned off Radio operations

ENGLISH
~
Changing the display pattern
Ÿ
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
! Start searching for a station.

Source operation display


When a station is received, searching
stops.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast
with sufficient signal strength,
lights up on the display.
“SMALL” (CD jacket image) graphic*1 is displayed.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
*2
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed. 1

2 Select a desired station frequency.


Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 17).

Goes back to the initial display pattern.

*1 You can use your edited file for graphic screen When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
(see pages 19 – 22). receive
Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
1
a longer time to show it on the display.
*2 The information bar will disappear if no
operation is performed for five seconds.

Continued on next page...


7

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 7 12/23/05 11:18:01 AM


2 Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
ENGLISH

number 4 of the FM1 band.

Using the number buttons


3 Exit from the setting. 1

lights up on the display.


Reception improves, but stereo effect will 2
be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, select “Mono Off”
in step 2. goes off.

3
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting— Using the Preset Station List


SSM (Strong-station Sequential • When appears on the display, you can
Memory) move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you
want to store into.
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
• By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List
will appear (go to step 4 on page 9).
2
2

3 Select “SSM.”

3 Display the Preset Station List.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are


searched and stored automatically in the FM
band.

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 8 12/23/05 11:18:03 AM


4 Select the preset number you want to
store into. Disc/USB memory

ENGLISH
operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
• You can move to the lists of the other FM change the source or eject the disc.
bands by pressing number button 5
( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly.

5 Store the station.

To stop playback and eject the disc

Listening to a preset station


Using the number buttons
1 Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played
repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you
want to listen to. ~

or
* If you have changed the external input
setting to “Ext In” (see page 18), you
cannot select the CD changer.

Using the Preset Station List Ÿ Select a disc.


For disc number from 01 – 06:
1 Display the Preset Station List, then
select the preset station you want to
listen to.

2 Change to the selected station. For disc number from 07 – 12:

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 9 12/23/05 11:18:05 AM


Playing a USB memory Track and folder information (CD/CD Text/
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a MP3/WMA/USB)
ENGLISH

USB memory.
Once you insert a disc or attach a USB
All tracks in the USB memory will be played
memory, the total track number/total
repeatedly until you change the source.
playing time (for CD/CD Text) and total
• Removing the USB memory will also stop
folder number/total track number (for MP3/
playback.
WMA/USB) appears, then the following
~ information appears...

Ex.: When “CD-CH” is selected as the source

Current folder number*1


Current disc number*2 Elapsed playing time
File type*1*3 Current track number

Ÿ USB input terminal


• For the audio CD or CD Text:
Disc name*4 and Track name*5
• For the MP3/WMA/USB:
Folder name and File name, or
Album/performer*6 and Track name*6

USB memory • When playing CD changer, the total


numbers will not appear.
If a USB memory has been attached...
*1 Displayed only when an MP3/WMA
track is played back.
*2 Displayed only when “CD-CH” is selected
as the source.
*3 Either MP3 or WMA indicator lights up
depending on the detected file.
Playback starts from where it has been stopped
*4 Appears only for CD Texts and CDs if
previously.
it has been recorded or assigned. (“No
• If a different USB memory is currently
Name” appears if no name is recorded or
attached, playback starts from the beginning.
assigned.)
*5 Appears only for CD Texts. (“No Name”
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it
appears if no name is recorded.)
out from the unit.
*6 Appears only when “Tag” is set to “On”
(see page 18).
Cautions:
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might
hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all the important data has been
backed up to avoid losing the data.

10

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 10 12/23/05 11:18:06 AM


About MP3 and WMA tracks To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and MP3/WMA/USB)

ENGLISH
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

When an MP3/WMA folder in an MP3/


WMA disc includes an image <jtw> file
edited by Image Converter (Ver 3.0)—
supplied in the CD-ROM, you can show the For the main unit:
image on the display while the tracks in the • Holding either of the buttons can display the
folder are played back—Image Link. (See Folder List (see page 12).
pages 17 and 29 for details.) For CD changer:
• Holding either of the buttons can display the
Disc List (see page 12).
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
compatible CD changer with your unit. (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. These units, however, are not
compatible with MP3 discs. To select a number from 01 – 06:
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD
changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD To select a number from 07 – 12:
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text
compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track • To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/


USB, it is required that folders are assigned
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks To select a particular track in a folder (for


MP3/WMA/USB):

11

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 11 12/23/05 11:18:07 AM


Other main functions 5 Change to the selected item.
ENGLISH

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

• When appears on the display, you can • The list disappears and playback starts.
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
1
Only possible on JVC
2 Select “LIST.” MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks


within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track


whose number is a single digit (1 to 9).
3 Select the list type.

*1 Selectable only when the 2


source is “CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the
media is MP3, WMA, or
USB. Each time you press the button, you can
skip 10 tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be
• CD-CH (only for MP3): If you select the selected and vice versa.
current disc (highlighted on the display),
its Folder List appears.
• If you select the current folder 3
(highlighted on the display), its File List
appears.

4 Select an item.

EX.: When “File” is selected in step 3

• You can move to the other lists by


pressing number button 5 ( ) or
6( ) repeatedly.

12

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 12 12/28/05 7:10:14 PM


Prohibiting disc ejection 7 Repeat play
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

ENGLISH
• “No Eject” appears on the display. Mode Plays repeatedly
Track: The current track [ ].
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder
procedure. [ ].
• “Eject OK” appears on the display. Disc*2: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

Selecting the playback modes


7 Random play
You can use only one of the following playback
modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode. Mode Plays at random


7 Intro play Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on [ ].
Disc*3: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
All*4: All tracks of the inserted discs
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Mode Plays beginning 15 seconds of...
*1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/
Track: All tracks of the current disc or USB).
USB memory [ ]. *2 Only while playing discs in the CD
Folder*1: First tracks of all folders changer.
[ ]. *3 Only while playing a disc.
Disc*2: First tracks of all the inserted *4 Only while playing discs in the CD
discs [ ]. changer or playing a USB memory.
Off: Cancels.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

13

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 13 12/23/05 11:18:10 AM


2 Use 4/¢ to select a
Sound adjustments cutoff frequency to the subwoofer.
• 80Hz: Frequencies higher than
ENGLISH

80 Hz are cut off.


Adjusting the sound • 120Hz: Frequencies higher than
120 Hz are cut off.
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your • 160Hz: Frequencies higher than
preference. 160 Hz are cut off.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing 3 Turn the control dial to adjust the
number button 3. subwoofer output level. [0 to 8]

C VolAdjust
1 Turn the control dial to adjust the input
level of each source (except FM).
[–5 to +5]
2 Adjust to match the input level of the
FM sound level.
• Before making an adjustment, select a
source you want to adjust.

D Loudness
Turn the control dial to activate or
• For “EQ” setting, see the following.
deactivate the loudness to produce a
well-balanced sound at low volume
3 Adjust the selected setting item. levels. [Off or On]
A Fad/Bal (Fader/Balance)
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to 4 Exit from the setting.
move to the “Fad/Bal” adjustment
display.
2 Adjust the speaker output balance
by pressing:
5 / ∞: between the front and rear
speakers. [F06 to R06]
4/¢ :
Selecting preset sound modes
between the left and right (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
speakers. [L06 to R06]
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to
the music genre.
B Subwoofer
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to Available sound modes
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment
FLAT (No sound mode is applied), H.ROCK
display.
(Hard rock), R & B (Rhythm & blues),
POP, JAZZ, DANCE, COUNTRY, REGGAE,
CLASSIC, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3

14

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 14 12/23/05 11:16:49 AM


Storing your own sound modes Sound Range/selectable items
elements Low Mid High

ENGLISH
You can adjust the sound modes and store your
own adjustments in memory. Level –06 to –06 to –06 to
• When appears on the display, you can +06 +06 +06
move back to the previous display by pressing FREQ 60 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz
number button 3. (Frequency) 80 Hz 1 kHz 12.5kHz
100 Hz 1.5kHz 15 kHz
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
Q (Band Q1.0 Q0.5 Fix
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 14. Q2.0 Q1.25
• In step 2, select “EQ.”
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
2 Select a sound mode. frequency ranges.

6 Store the adjustments.

To display the rest

3 Select a frequency range.

4 Adjust the sound elements of the


selected frequency range.
1 Use 5 / ∞ to adjust the level.
2 Press number button 2 ( ),
then turn the control dial to select the
frequency.
3 Press number button 2 ( ), then
turn the control dial to select the band
width.

15

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 15 12/23/05 11:16:53 AM


The list below shows the preset value setting for each sound mode:
Preset values
ENGLISH

Sound Low Mid High


modes Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band
(Frequency) width) (Frequency) width) (Frequency) width)
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
H.ROCK +03 100 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
JAZZ +03 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz Fix
DANCE +04 60 Hz Q1.0 -02 1 kHz Q1.0 +01 10 kHz
COUNTRY +02 60 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.0 +02 12.5kHz
REGGAE +03 60 Hz Q1.25 +02 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 12.5kHz
CLASSIC +01 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz

General settings — PSM


Basic procedure 3 Select a PSM item.

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)


items listed in the table that follows.
• By pressing either of the buttons
repeatedly, you can also move to the item
1 of the other categories.

4 Adjust the selected PSM item.

An item previously selected appears on the


display.
2 Select a PSM category.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust other
PSM items if necessary.

6 Exit from the setting.


To display the rest

16

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 16 12/23/05 11:16:54 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Demo/Link Demo: [Initial]; Display demonstration will be

ENGLISH
Display activated automatically, [6].
demonstration Image Link: To show a still image while playing MP3/
WMA tracks, [11, 29].
Off: Cancels.
• Still image appears if no operation is done for about
MOVIE

20 seconds.
LevelMeter You can select the different level meter patterns.
Audio level meter Meter 1 [Initial] O Meter 2
• Press DISP repeatedly to show the selected level meter.
Pict Download: [Initial]; Download files, [19].
Pictures Set: Activate the stored files, [22]
Delete: Delete the stored files, [21].
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [6]
Hour adjustment [Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
CLOCK

Clock Min 00 – 59, [6]


Minute adjustment [Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
24H/12H 12Hours – 24Hours, [6]
Time display mode [Initial: 12Hours]
Scroll Once: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.
Scroll Auto: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals).
Off: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the
display regardless of the setting.
Dimmer Auto: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on
Dimmer the headlights.
Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Time Set: Set the timer for dimmer, [22].
DISPLAY

Any hour – Any hour


From – To*1: [Initial: 6PM – 7AM]
Contrast 1 – 10: [Initial: 5]; Adjust the display contrast to
Contrast make the display indications clear and
legible.
LCD Type Negative: [Initial]; Negative pattern of the display
Display type (except still images and animation).
Auto: Positive pattern will be selected during the
day time*2; while negative pattern will be
used during the night time*2.
Positive: Positive pattern of the display.
*1 Adjustable only when “Dimmer” is set to “Time Set.”
*2 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.

Continued on next page...


17

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 17 12/23/05 11:16:56 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Font Type You can select the font type used on the display.
ENGLISH

Font type 1 [Initial] O 2


DISPLAY

Tag On: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information display


Tag display while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].
Off: Cancels.
IF Band Auto: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to
Intermediate reduce interference noises between close
frequency filter stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
TUNER

Wide: Subject to the interference noises from


adjacent stations, but sound quality will
not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
Ext Input*3 Changer: [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [9], an
External input Apple iPod or a JVC D. player, [24].
Ext In: To use any other external component than
the above, [26].
Beep On: [Initial]; Activates the key-touch tone.
Key-touch tone Off: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
Telephone Muting1/Muting2: Select either one which mutes the
AUDIO

Telephone muting sounds while using a cellular phone.


Off: [Initial]; Cancels.
• If CD, CD changer, or USB has been selected as the source,
playback pauses during telephone muting.
Amp Gain You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Amplifier gain High PWR: [Initial]; Volume 00 – Volume 50
control Low PWR: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the
maximum power of the speaker is less than
50 W to prevent them from being damaged.)
Color Sel [Initial: All Source]; You can select your favorite display color
Color selection for each source (or for all sources), [22].
Color Set You can create your own colors, and select them for the
display color, [23].
COLOR

Day Color: User color during the day time*4.


NightColor: User color during the night time*4.
Red +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Green +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Blue +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
*3 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—TUNER, CD, or USB.
*4 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.

18

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 18 12/23/05 11:16:57 AM


• To download the file(s), see the following.
Graphic displays • To delete the file(s), see pages 20 and 21.
• To activate the file(s), see page 22.

ENGLISH
Before starting the following procedure,
prepare a CD-R including still images (pictures)
and animations (movies).
• With Image Converter (Ver 3.0) included in IMPORTANT:
the supplied CD-ROM, you can create and • Refer also to Image Converter PDF files
download your own images and animations. included in the “Manual” folder on the
(Samples are included in the CD-ROM.) supplied CD-ROM.
These images/animation will be shown during • Still images (pictures) and animations
playing a source. (movie) should have the following
• You can store “LARGE” or “SMALL” pictures extension code in their file names:
and movies. – jtl: for large size still images
Picture: 30 still images each – jtm: for small size still images
Movie: 60 frames each – jta: for large size animations
– jtb: for small size animations
Basic procedure – jtw: for Image Link (see pages 11 and 17)
• Before you download or delete the files,
• When appears on the display, you can observe the following:
move back to the previous display by pressing – Do not download a file while driving.
number button 3. – Do not turn off the ignition key of the car
• When / appears on the display, while downloading or deleting a file.*
you can move to the other lists by pressing – Do not detach the control panel while
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly. downloading or deleting a file.*
– Do not attach or detach a USB memory
1 Insert a CD-R or the supplied while downloading a file.*
CD-ROM. * If you do so, the file download or deletion
will not be done correctly.

2 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.


• In step 2, select “MOVIE.”
• In step 3, select “Pict.” Downloading pictures or an animation
• It takes a long time to download an
animation. For details, see page 30.
3 Select an item. • To activate the downloaded files, see page 22.

1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on left column.


• In step 3, select “Download.”

4 Select a picture size.

or

The display goes to the PICT menu.

Continued on next page...


19

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 19 12/23/05 11:16:58 AM


2 8 • To download more pictures from
the same folder, repeat steps 5 to 7.
ENGLISH

• To download more pictures from


another folder, press number button
3( ). Then, repeat steps 3 to 7.

9 Exit from the setting.

“File Check” flashes and then the Folder List


appears on the display. Deleting the files
Deleting the stored animation
3 Select a folder.
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

2
4 Display the File List.

5 Select a file.
EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
step 4 on page 19

3 Delete the animation.


6 Confirm the selection.

EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected 4 Exit from the setting.

7 Download the file.

20

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 20 12/23/05 11:17:00 AM


Deleting the stored pictures 4 Exit from the setting.
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.

ENGLISH
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

2 Deleting all the stored files


1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”

The File List appears on the display.

3 • To delete one of the stored pictures


1 Use 5 / ∞ to select a file. Then, press
number button 1 ( ) to confirm EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
the selection. step 4 on page 19

3 Delete all the stored files.


EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete the selected file.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to delete more
pictures. 4 Exit from the setting.

• To delete all the stored pictures


1 Press number button 2 ( ).

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in step 4 on page


19
2 Press number button 1 ( ) to
delete all the stored pictures.

21

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 21 12/23/05 11:17:01 AM


Activating the downloaded files
Setting the time for dimmer
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 19.
ENGLISH

• When appears on the display, you can


• In step 3, select “Set.”
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
2 Select the display type.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.
• In step 2, select “DISPLAY.”
• In step 3, select “Dimmer.”

2 Select “Time Set.”

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in


step 4 on page 19 and “Movie”
is selected

Movie Your edited animation stored


in “Movie” is activated. \ Go 3 Adjust the dimmer time.
to step 3. 1 Turn the control dial to set the dimmer
Picture One of your edited still images time.
stored in “Picture” is activated. 2 Press ¢ to select “To.” Then, turn
\ Go to step 3. the control dial to set the dimmer end
Slideshow All stored still images are time.
activated and shown in
sequence (UserSlide). 4 Exit from the setting.
• If no still image is stored,
beeps sound.

3 Select a file.*

Changing the display color


You can select your favorite display color for
each source (or all sources).
The unit returns to the playback display.
• When appears on the display, you can
• To display the activated files, see page 7. move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
* If no still image or no animation is stored, you
can only select “Default.”

22

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 22 12/23/05 11:17:03 AM


Setting the display color 6 Exit from the setting.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.

ENGLISH
• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
• In step 3, select “Color Sel.”
Creating your own color—User Color
2 You can create your own colors—“Day Color”
or “NightColor.”

1 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 16.


• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
3 Select a source. • In step 3, select “Color Set.”

2 Select “Day Color” or “NightColor.”

All Source*1 O CD O Changer (or Ext


In*2) O USB*3 O FM O AM O Ipod*3/
D.PLAYER*3 O (back to the beginning)

*1 When you select “All Source,” you can use


the same color for all the sources.
*2 Depends on the “Ext Input” setting, see
page 18.
*3 Displayed only when the target
component is connected.
3 Select a primary color.
4 Select a color.

4 Adjust the level (+00 to +11) of the


Every*4 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O Leaves selected primary color.
O Grass O Apple O Rose O Amber
O Honey O Violet O Grape O Pale O
User*5 O (back to the beginning)

*4 The color changes every 2 seconds.


*5 The user-edited colors—“Day Color” and
“NightColor” will be applied (see right 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
column for details). primary colors.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the color 6 Exit from the setting.
for each source (except when selecting
“All Source” in step 3).

23

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 23 12/23/05 11:17:04 AM


3 Assign a title.
Title assignment 1 Press number button 4 ( )
ENGLISH

repeatedly to select a character set.


You can assign titles to station frequencies, CDs
(both in the unit and the CD changer), and
external components (Ext In).

Maximum number of
Sources
characters
FM/AM tuner Up to 10 characters (up to 30 2 Turn the control dial to select a
station frequencies including character.
both FM and AM) • For available characters, see page 30.
CDs/CD-CH* Up to 32 characters (up to 3 Use 4/¢ to move to the next
30 discs) (or previous) character position.
External Up to 8 characters 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you finish
components entering the title.
* You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or MP3/
WMA/USB. 4 Store the title.

• When appears on the display, you can


move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.

1 Select the sources. To erase the entire title


• For FM/AM tuner: Tune into a station. In step 3 above...
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external components: Select “Ext In”
(see page 18).

2 Display the TITLE input screen.


iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod
or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:


Connect either one of the following (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of this unit.
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for
controlling an iPod.
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for
controlling a D. player.

24

EN24-27KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 24 12/23/05 11:17:19 AM


• For connection, see Installation/Connection To fast-forward or reverse the track
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

ENGLISH
with the interface adapter.

Caution: To go to the next or previous tracks

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the


vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Preparations: Selecting a track from the menu


Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external
input setting (see page 18). 1 Enter the main menu.

~
Now the 4/¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons.*

Ÿ 2 Select the desired menu.

Playback starts automatically from where For iPod:


it has been paused (for iPod) or stopped Playlists O Artists O Albums O Songs
(for D. player) previously. O Genres O Composers O (back to the
beginning)
! Adjust the volume.
For D. player:
Playlist O Artist O Album O Genre O
Track O (back to the beginning)

⁄ Adjust the sound mode as you want.


* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
(See pages 14 – 16.) – When you confirm the selection of a track.
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.

To pause (only for iPod) or stop (only for


D. player) playback

• To resume playback, press it again.


Continued on next page...
25

EN24-27KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 25 12/23/05 11:17:22 AM


3 Confirm the selection. 7 Random play
ENGLISH

To move back to the previous


menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts


automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 Mode Plays at random
until the desired track is played.
Song: Functions the same as “Shuffle
• Holding 4/¢ can skips 10
Songs” of the iPod [ ] or
items at a time.
“Random Play = On” of the
D. player [ ].
Album*: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Selecting the playback modes Albums” of the iPod [ ].
Off: Cancels.
1 * For iPod: Only if you select “All Albums”
in “Albums” of the main
“MENU.”
2 Select your desired playback mode.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
7 Repeat play pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

Other external component


operations
Mode Plays repeatedly You can connect an external component to
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line
One: Functions the same as “Repeat
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Mode = One” for the D. player
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
[ ].
Manual (separate volume).
All: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat
• For listening to the USB memory, see page 10.
Mode = All” for the D. player
• For listening to an iPod or a D. player, see
[ ].
pages 24 – 26.
Off: Cancels.

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 18


and select the external input (“Ext In”).

26

EN24-27KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 26 12/23/05 11:17:24 AM


Ÿ Turn on the connected component
Disc operations
and start playing the source. Caution for DualDisc playback

ENGLISH
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does
! Adjust the volume. not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.

General
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
pages 14 – 16.)
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),
MP3 and WMA formats.
More about this unit • If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same playback source
again, playback starts from where it has been
Basic operations stopped previously.
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also Inserting a disc
turn on the power. If the source is ready, • When a disc is inserted upside down, “Please
playback also starts. Eject” appears on the display. Press 0 to eject
the disc.
Turning off the power • Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and
• If you turn off the power while listening to a unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into
disc, disc play will start from where playback the loading slot.
has been stopped previously, next time you
turn on the power. Playing a disc
– For MP3/WMA disc: Disc play will start • While playing an audio CD: If a title has been
from the first track of the current folder if assigned to the audio CD (see page 24), it will
a <jtw> file is included and Image Link is be shown on the display.
activated (see page 17). • While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent
Tuner operations sounds.
Storing stations in memory
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and • Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
stations are stored newly. • This unit can play back only files of the same
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest type which are first detected if a disc includes
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency). both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
– When SSM is over, the station stored in WMA files.
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in. • This unit can play back multi-session discs;
• When storing a station manually, the however, unclosed sessions will be skipped
previously preset station is erased when a new while playing.
station is stored in the same preset number.

Continued on next page...


27

EN24-27KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 27 12/23/05 11:17:25 AM


• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played • The maximum number of characters for file/
back on this unit because of their disc folder names vary among the disc format used
characteristics, or for the following reasons: (includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
ENGLISH

– Discs are dirty or scratched. <.wma>).


– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens – ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
inside the unit. – ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty. – Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are – Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters
written with “Packet Write” method. – Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)
– There are improper recording conditions characters
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions * The parenthetic figure is the maximum
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.). number of characters for file/folder names in
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time case the total number of files and folders is
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than 313 or more.
that of regular CDs. • This unit can play back files recorded in VBR
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs: (variable bit rate).
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy
seal stuck to the surface. in elapsed time display, and do not show
– Discs on which labels can be directly the actual elapsed time. Especially, after
printed by an ink jet printer. performing the search function, this
Using these discs under high temperatures or difference becomes noticeable.
high humidities may cause malfunctions or • This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
damage to the unit. 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
Playing an MP3/WMA disc – MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
format.
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
• This unit can show the names of albums,
– WMA files encoded with lossless,
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,
professional, and voice format.
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA
– WMA files which are not based upon
files.
Windows Media® Audio.
• This unit can display only one-byte
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
characters. No other characters can be
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
correctly displayed.
ATRAC3, etc.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
• The search function works but search speed is
meeting the conditions below:
not constant.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

28

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 28 12/23/05 11:17:39 AM


Playing MP3/WMA track from a USB memory Image Link
• While playing from a USB memory, the • Image Link will not work in the following

ENGLISH
playback order may differ from other players. cases:
• This unit may be unable to play back some – If no <jtw> file is included in an MP3/
USB memories or some files due to their WMA folder.
characteristics or recording conditions. – If Intro play is activated.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories – If the source is changed to another from
and connection ports, some USB memories “CD.”
may not be attached properly or the • If more than one <jtw> file are included in a
connection might be loose. folder, a file with the youngest file number is
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory used for Image Link.
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from
pressing the 0 button. Ejecting a disc
• If the connected USB memory does not have
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
the correct files, “No Files” appears and the
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted
unit returns to the previous source.
again into the loading slot to protect it from
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
dust. (Disc will not be played this time.)
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
meeting the conditions below: Sound adjustment
– Bit rate: General
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)
fader level to the center (“00”).
WMA: 5 kbps — 320 kbps
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a
– Sampling frequency:
subwoofer is connected.
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1)
• You cannot change the input level—
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If you try to
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
adjust it for FM, “Fix” will appear.
(MPEG-2.5)
WMA: 8 kHz — 48 kHz
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in Graphic display
VBR (variable bit rate). General
• The maximum number of characters for • You can display two sizes of pictures and
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 animations.
characters for MP3/WMA tag information. – LARGE: <jtl> for still pictures and <jta> for
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files the animations;
and 250 folders (999 files per folder). The image is displayed with the
dimension of the screen.
– SMALL: <jtm> for still pictures and <jtb>
for animations;
The image is displayed like a
CD jacket (on the left side of the
display).
• Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
longer time to show it on the display.

Continued on next page...


29

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 29 12/23/05 11:17:42 AM


Downloading (or deleting) files Title assignment
• You can download a file only while selecting • If you try to assign titles to more than 30
ENGLISH

“CD” for the playback source; on the other station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name
hand, you can delete a file while selecting any Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before
source. assignment.
• After finishing the procedure to download a • Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can
file, playback starts from the beginning. also be shown if you play back the disc from
• If you have already downloaded an animation, the unit and vice versa.
downloading a new animation deletes the
previously stored animation. Available characters on the display
• It takes a long time to download an
Capital letters
animation.
– About 3 to 4 seconds for a still image (one
frame).
– About 1 to 2 minutes for an animation of 30
Small letters
frames.
– About 3 minutes for an animation of 60
frames.
• If you try to operate the downloading
Numbers and symbols
procedure from a disc without any <jtl>,
<jtm>, <jta>, and <jtb> files, beeps sound.
• If you try to store more than 30 images
for each size “LARGE” and “SMALL,”
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start
downloading. Delete unwanted files before iPod or D. player operations
downloading. • When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
• If the total frame number of an animation D. player is charged through this unit.
downloaded exceeds 60, the frames exceeding • While the iPod or D. player is connected, all
that number are ignored. operations from the iPod or D. player are
disabled. Perform all operations from this
General settings—PSM unit.
• The text information may not be displayed
• “Auto” setting for “Dimmer” may not work
correctly.
correctly on some vehicles, particularly on
– Some characters such as accented letters
those having a control dial for dimming. In
cannot be shown correctly on the display.
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any
– Depends on the condition of
other than “Auto.”
communication between the iPod or
• If “LCD Type” is set to “Auto,” the display
D. player and the unit.
pattern will change to the “Positive” or
• If the text information includes more than
“Negative” pattern depending on the
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
“Dimmer” setting.
also page 17). This unit can display up to 40
• Changing the “Amp Gain” setting from
characters.
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” when the level
is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit
automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”

30

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 30 12/23/05 11:17:43 AM


Notice: How to handle discs
When operating an iPod or D. player, When removing a disc from Center holder

ENGLISH
some operations may not be performed its case, press down the center
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the holder of the case and lift the disc
following JVC web site: out, holding it by the edges.
For iPod users: • Always hold the disc by the
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
ks-pd100/index.html> When storing a disc into its case, gently insert
For D. player users: the disc around the center holder (with the
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ printed surface facing up).
ks-pd500/index.html> • Make sure to store discs into the cases after
use.

To keep discs clean


A dirty disc may not play correctly.
Maintenance If a disc does become dirty, wipe it
with a soft cloth in a straight line
from center to edge.
How to clean the connectors • Do not use any solvent (for example,
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
connectors. benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to
To play new discs
damage the connectors. New discs may have some rough
spots around the inner and outer
edges. If such a disc is used, this
unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Connector
Do not use the following discs:

Moisture condensation Warped disc


Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car. Sticker Sticker residue
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until Stick-on label
the moisture evaporates.

31

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 31 12/23/05 11:17:44 AM


Troubleshooting
ENGLISH

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service
center.

Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
speakers. • Check the cords and connections.
General

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• “Connect Error” appears on the Remove the control panel, wipe the connector,
display. then attach it again (see page 2).
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually.
FM/AM

work.
• Static noise while listening to the Connect the antenna firmly.
radio.
• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
back. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot which you used for recording.
be skipped.
Disc playback

• Disc can be neither played back nor • Unlock the disc (see page 13).
ejected. • Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
Disc,” “Loading Error,” or “Eject
Error” flashes).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,
Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
MP3/WMA playback

the file names.


• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
(“File Check” keeps flashing on the
display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are
you have intended them to play. recorded.

32

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 32 12/23/05 11:17:45 AM


Symptoms Remedies/Causes

ENGLISH
• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs while playing. This is
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
MP3/WMA playback

• “Not Support” appears on the display Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate
and track skips. format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA
track.
• “NO MUSIC” appears on the display. Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 30).
• Noise is generated. The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the • Readout time varies depending on the USB
display. memory.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Attach a USB memory that contains tracks
encoded in an appropriate format.
USB memory playback

• “Not Support” appears on the display The track is unplayable.


and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, • The attached USB memory may be
then returns to the previous source. malfunctioning, or may not have been
formatted correctly.
The files included in the USB memory are
corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory
repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the
display.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 30).
• While playing a track, sound is MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied
sometimes interrupted. into the USB memory.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB
memory, and try again.
CD changer

• “No Disc” appears on the display. Insert a disc into the magazine.
• “No Magazine” appears on the Insert the magazine.
display.

Continued on next page...


33

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 33 12/23/05 11:17:46 AM


Symptoms Remedies/Causes
ENGLISH

• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly
CD changer

and press the reset button of the CD changer.


• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Press the reset button of the CD changer.
the display.
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• Download does not seem to finish. It takes quite a long time to download an
animation with many frames (see page 30).
• Animation does not move. Wait until the operating temperature resumes.
PICT—PSM

• The display graphic function does


not work correctly.
• You cannot select an image or Select an image only after downloading the
animation for “Set” in “Pict.” appropriate files in memory.
(“Default” cannot be changed for
“Movie” and “Picture, ” or beeps
sound for “Slideshow.”)
• The iPod or D. player does not turn • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
on or does not work. • Update the firmware version.
• Change the battery.
• Buttons do not work as intended. The functions of the buttons have been changed.
Press MODE before performing the operation.
• The sound is distorted. Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the
iPod/D. player.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display. Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Playback stops. The headphones are disconnected during
iPod/D. player playback

playback. Restart the playback operation using


the control panel (see page 25).
• No sound can be heard when Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard. Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,
• “Error 01” appears on the display connect it again.
when connecting a D. player.
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK” No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or
appears on the display. D. player.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and
the display. iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Check the connection between the adapter and
this unit.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.
not work after disconnecting from
this unit.

34

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 34 12/23/05 11:17:46 AM


Specifications

ENGLISH
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION
Maximum Power Output: Type: Compact disc player
Front: 50 W per channel Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical
Rear: 50 W per channel pickup (semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS): Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% Dynamic Range: 96 dB
total harmonic distortion. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% MP3 Decoding Format:
total harmonic distortion. MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Tone Control Range: WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding
Low: ±12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, Format:
200 Hz) Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Mid: ±12 dB (500 Hz, 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz, Playable USB memory:
2.5 kHz) Format: FAT 12/16/32
High: ±12 dB (10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
17.5 kHz) Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Max. Current: Less than 500 mA
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Line-Out Level/Impedance: GENERAL
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Power Requirement:
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Operating Voltage:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Grounding System: Negative ground
Other Terminal: CD changer
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
TUNER SECTION Dimensions (W × H × D):
Frequency Range: Installation Size (approx.):
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz 182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
[FM Tuner] Mass (approx.):
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
without notice.
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
[AM Tuner] registered trademarks or trademarks of
Sensitivity: 20 μV Microsoft Corporation in the United States
Selectivity: 35 dB and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.

35

EN28-35KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 35 12/23/05 11:17:47 AM


Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Ada MASALAH dengan cara


pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda

EN, IN
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0106DTSMDTJEIN

Rear_KD-G825_004A_1.indd 2 15/12/05 5:30:05 pm


ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER KD-G825

KD-G825

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0360-005A
[UT]

Cover_KD-G825_005A_1.indd 2 15/12/05 5:30:47 pm


Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
ENGLISH

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS


1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit How to use the MODE/SEL button


If you use MODE or SEL (select), the display
and some controls (such as the number buttons,
4/¢ buttons, 5/∞ buttons, and the
control dial) enter the corresponding control
mode.
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after
pressing MODE, to operate the FM tuner.
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

“Please Eject” appears on the display.

Works as time countdown indicator.

• If this does not work, reset your unit. To use these controls for original functions
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects. again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
of these buttons until the control is cleared.
• Pressing MODE again also restores original
functions. However, pressing SEL makes the
unit enters a different mode.
Caution:
If the temperature inside the car is below 0°C, the movement of animation and text scroll will be
halted on the display to prevent the display from being blurred. appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, and the operating temperature is resumed, these functions will
start working again.
2

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 2 12/23/05 11:18:26 AM


How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with
CONTENTS

ENGLISH
the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in Control panel ................................... 4
“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............. 5
Getting started ................................. 6
Press briefly. Basic operations ................................................... 6
Radio operations .............................. 7
Press repeatedly. Disc/USB memory operations............. 9
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 9
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................ 9
Press either Playing a USB memory ......................................... 10
one.
Sound adjustments ........................... 14
Press and hold until your General settings — PSM ................... 16
desired response begins. Title assignment............................... 24
Press and hold both
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24
buttons at the same time. Other external component
operations .................................... 26
The following marks are used to indicate... More about this unit ......................... 27
: Built-in CD player operations.
Maintenance .................................... 31
: External CD changer operations. Troubleshooting ............................... 32
: External USB memory operations. Specifications ................................... 35

Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, For safety...
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as
involved in a traffic accident.
this will block outside sounds, making driving
dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any
Caution on volume setting: complicated operations.
Discs produce very little noise compared
with other sources. Lower the volume Temperature inside the car...
before playing a disc to avoid damaging If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
the speakers by the sudden increase of the or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
output level. the car becomes normal before operating the
unit.

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 3 12/23/05 11:18:29 AM


Control panel
ENGLISH

Parts identification

1 BAND button 7 EQ (equalizer) button


2 • Control dial 8 0 (eject) button
• (standby/on attenuator) button 9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
3 DISP (display) button p SRC (source) button
4 Remote sensor q (control panel release) button
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to w SEL (select) button
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial e MODE button
lighting). r Number buttons
5 Display window t 4/¢ buttons
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

How to detach/attach the control panel


Detaching... Attaching...

Lever CAUTION:
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while
the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back
into lock position before attaching the panel.

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 4 12/23/05 11:18:30 AM


Remote controller — RM-RK50

ENGLISH
Installing the lithium coin battery Main elements and features
(CR2025)

Aim the remote controller directly at the 1 (standby/on/attenuator) button


remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is • Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
no obstacle in between. attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning: 2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Do not install any battery other than • Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may • Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
explode. • Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
• Store the battery in a place where children USB.
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident. • While playing an MP3 disc on an
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, MP3-compatible CD changer:
cracking, or starting a fire: – Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, – Changes the folder if pressed and held.
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire. • While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
– Do not leave the battery with other JVC D. player:
metallic materials. – Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or D ∞.
similar tools. – Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
when throwing away or saving it. selecting buttons.)*
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
Caution: 4 SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (i-EQ: intelligent
equalizer).

* 5 U: Returns to the previous menu.


D ∞: Confirms the selection.

Continued on next page...


5

EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 5 12/23/05 11:18:31 AM


5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons pages 14 – 16.)
ENGLISH

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.


• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held. To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player To restore the sound, press it
(in menu selecting mode): again.
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.) To turn off the power
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and
held.

Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
~ Turn on the power. 16 – 18.
1

Ÿ 2-1 Canceling the display


demonstrations
Turn the control dial to set “Demo/Link”
to “Off.”

2-2 Setting the clock


1 Press number button 4 ( ).
* You cannot select these sources if they “Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then,
are not ready or not connected. turn the control dial to adjust the
hour.
! For FM/AM tuner 2 Press ¢ to select “Clock Min”
(minute). Then, turn the control
dial to adjust the minute.
3 Press ¢ to select “24H/12H.”
⁄ Adjust the volume.
Then, turn the control dial to select
“12Hours” or “24Hours,” time
display mode.

3 Exit from the setting.

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 6 12/23/05 11:17:58 AM


To check the current clock time when the
power is turned off Radio operations

ENGLISH
~
Changing the display pattern
Ÿ
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
! Start searching for a station.

Source operation display


When a station is received, searching
stops.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast
with sufficient signal strength,
lights up on the display.
“SMALL” (CD jacket image) graphic*1 is displayed.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
*2
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed. 1

2 Select a desired station frequency.


Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 17).

Goes back to the initial display pattern.

*1 You can use your edited file for graphic screen When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
(see pages 19 – 22). receive
Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
1
a longer time to show it on the display.
*2 The information bar will disappear if no
operation is performed for five seconds.

Continued on next page...


7

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 7 12/23/05 11:18:01 AM


2 Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
ENGLISH

number 4 of the FM1 band.

Using the number buttons


3 Exit from the setting. 1

lights up on the display.


Reception improves, but stereo effect will 2
be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, select “Mono Off”
in step 2. goes off.

3
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting— Using the Preset Station List


SSM (Strong-station Sequential • When appears on the display, you can
Memory) move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you
want to store into.
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
• By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List
will appear (go to step 4 on page 9).
2
2

3 Select “SSM.”

3 Display the Preset Station List.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are


searched and stored automatically in the FM
band.

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 8 12/23/05 11:18:03 AM


4 Select the preset number you want to
store into. Disc/USB memory

ENGLISH
operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
• You can move to the lists of the other FM change the source or eject the disc.
bands by pressing number button 5
( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly.

5 Store the station.

To stop playback and eject the disc

Listening to a preset station


Using the number buttons
1 Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played
repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you
want to listen to. ~

or
* If you have changed the external input
setting to “Ext In” (see page 18), you
cannot select the CD changer.

Using the Preset Station List Ÿ Select a disc.


For disc number from 01 – 06:
1 Display the Preset Station List, then
select the preset station you want to
listen to.

2 Change to the selected station. For disc number from 07 – 12:

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 9 12/23/05 11:18:05 AM


Playing a USB memory Track and folder information (CD/CD Text/
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a MP3/WMA/USB)
ENGLISH

USB memory.
Once you insert a disc or attach a USB
All tracks in the USB memory will be played
memory, the total track number/total
repeatedly until you change the source.
playing time (for CD/CD Text) and total
• Removing the USB memory will also stop
folder number/total track number (for MP3/
playback.
WMA/USB) appears, then the following
~ information appears...

Ex.: When “CD-CH” is selected as the source

Current folder number*1


Current disc number*2 Elapsed playing time
File type*1*3 Current track number

Ÿ USB input terminal


• For the audio CD or CD Text:
Disc name*4 and Track name*5
• For the MP3/WMA/USB:
Folder name and File name, or
Album/performer*6 and Track name*6

USB memory • When playing CD changer, the total


numbers will not appear.
If a USB memory has been attached...
*1 Displayed only when an MP3/WMA
track is played back.
*2 Displayed only when “CD-CH” is selected
as the source.
*3 Either MP3 or WMA indicator lights up
depending on the detected file.
Playback starts from where it has been stopped
*4 Appears only for CD Texts and CDs if
previously.
it has been recorded or assigned. (“No
• If a different USB memory is currently
Name” appears if no name is recorded or
attached, playback starts from the beginning.
assigned.)
*5 Appears only for CD Texts. (“No Name”
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it
appears if no name is recorded.)
out from the unit.
*6 Appears only when “Tag” is set to “On”
(see page 18).
Cautions:
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might
hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all the important data has been
backed up to avoid losing the data.

10

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 10 12/23/05 11:18:06 AM


About MP3 and WMA tracks To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and MP3/WMA/USB)

ENGLISH
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

When an MP3/WMA folder in an MP3/


WMA disc includes an image <jtw> file
edited by Image Converter (Ver 3.0)—
supplied in the CD-ROM, you can show the For the main unit:
image on the display while the tracks in the • Holding either of the buttons can display the
folder are played back—Image Link. (See Folder List (see page 12).
pages 17 and 29 for details.) For CD changer:
• Holding either of the buttons can display the
Disc List (see page 12).
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
compatible CD changer with your unit. (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. These units, however, are not
compatible with MP3 discs. To select a number from 01 – 06:
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD
changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD To select a number from 07 – 12:
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text
compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track • To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/


USB, it is required that folders are assigned
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks To select a particular track in a folder (for


MP3/WMA/USB):

11

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 11 12/23/05 11:18:07 AM


Other main functions 5 Change to the selected item.
ENGLISH

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

• When appears on the display, you can • The list disappears and playback starts.
move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
1
Only possible on JVC
2 Select “LIST.” MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks


within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track


whose number is a single digit (1 to 9).
3 Select the list type.

*1 Selectable only when the 2


source is “CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the
media is MP3, WMA, or
USB. Each time you press the button, you can
skip 10 tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be
• CD-CH (only for MP3): If you select the selected and vice versa.
current disc (highlighted on the display),
its Folder List appears.
• If you select the current folder 3
(highlighted on the display), its File List
appears.

4 Select an item.

EX.: When “File” is selected in step 3

• You can move to the other lists by


pressing number button 5 ( ) or
6( ) repeatedly.

12

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 12 12/28/05 7:10:14 PM


Prohibiting disc ejection 7 Repeat play
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

ENGLISH
• “No Eject” appears on the display. Mode Plays repeatedly
Track: The current track [ ].
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder
procedure. [ ].
• “Eject OK” appears on the display. Disc*2: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

Selecting the playback modes


7 Random play
You can use only one of the following playback
modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode. Mode Plays at random


7 Intro play Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on [ ].
Disc*3: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
All*4: All tracks of the inserted discs
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Mode Plays beginning 15 seconds of...
*1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/
Track: All tracks of the current disc or USB).
USB memory [ ]. *2 Only while playing discs in the CD
Folder*1: First tracks of all folders changer.
[ ]. *3 Only while playing a disc.
Disc*2: First tracks of all the inserted *4 Only while playing discs in the CD
discs [ ]. changer or playing a USB memory.
Off: Cancels.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

13

EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 13 12/23/05 11:18:10 AM


2 Use 4/¢ to select a
Sound adjustments cutoff frequency to the subwoofer.
• 80Hz: Frequencies higher than
ENGLISH

80 Hz are cut off.


Adjusting the sound • 120Hz: Frequencies higher than
120 Hz are cut off.
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your • 160Hz: Frequencies higher than
preference. 160 Hz are cut off.
• When appears on the display, you can
move back to the previous display by pressing 3 Turn the control dial to adjust the
number button 3. subwoofer output level. [0 to 8]

C VolAdjust
1 Turn the control dial to adjust the input
level of each source (except FM).
[–5 to +5]
2 Adjust to match the input level of the
FM sound level.
• Before making an adjustment, select a
source you want to adjust.

D Loudness
Turn the control dial to activate or
• For “EQ” setting, see the following.
deactivate the loudness to produce a
well-balanced sound at low volume
3 Adjust the selected setting item. levels. [Off or On]
A Fad/Bal (Fader/Balance)
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to 4 Exit from the setting.
move to the “Fad/Bal” adjustment
display.
2 Adjust the speaker output balance
by pressing:
5 / ∞: between the front and rear
speakers. [F06 to R06]
4/¢ :
Selecting preset sound modes
between the left and right (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
speakers. [L06 to R06]
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to
the music genre.
B Subwoofer
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to Available sound modes
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment
FLAT (No sound mode is applied), H.ROCK
display.
(Hard rock), R & B (Rhythm & blues),
POP, JAZZ, DANCE, COUNTRY, REGGAE,
CLASSIC, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3

14

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 14 12/23/05 11:16:49 AM


Storing your own sound modes Sound Range/selectable items
elements Low Mid High

ENGLISH
You can adjust the sound modes and store your
own adjustments in memory. Level –06 to –06 to –06 to
• When appears on the display, you can +06 +06 +06
move back to the previous display by pressing FREQ 60 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz
number button 3. (Frequency) 80 Hz 1 kHz 12.5kHz
100 Hz 1.5kHz 15 kHz
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
Q (Band Q1.0 Q0.5 Fix
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 14. Q2.0 Q1.25
• In step 2, select “EQ.”
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
2 Select a sound mode. frequency ranges.

6 Store the adjustments.

To display the rest

3 Select a frequency range.

4 Adjust the sound elements of the


selected frequency range.
1 Use 5 / ∞ to adjust the level.
2 Press number button 2 ( ),
then turn the control dial to select the
frequency.
3 Press number button 2 ( ), then
turn the control dial to select the band
width.

15

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 15 12/23/05 11:16:53 AM


The list below shows the preset value setting for each sound mode:
Preset values
ENGLISH

Sound Low Mid High


modes Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band
(Frequency) width) (Frequency) width) (Frequency) width)
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
H.ROCK +03 100 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
JAZZ +03 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz Fix
DANCE +04 60 Hz Q1.0 -02 1 kHz Q1.0 +01 10 kHz
COUNTRY +02 60 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.0 +02 12.5kHz
REGGAE +03 60 Hz Q1.25 +02 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 12.5kHz
CLASSIC +01 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz

General settings — PSM


Basic procedure 3 Select a PSM item.

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)


items listed in the table that follows.
• By pressing either of the buttons
repeatedly, you can also move to the item
1 of the other categories.

4 Adjust the selected PSM item.

An item previously selected appears on the


display.
2 Select a PSM category.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust other
PSM items if necessary.

6 Exit from the setting.


To display the rest

16

EN14-23KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 16 12/23/05 11:16:54 AM


Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Demo/Link Demo: [Initial]; Display demonstration will be

ENGLISH
Display activated automatically, [6].
demonstration Image Link: To show a still image while playing MP3/
WMA tracks, [11, 29].
Off: Cancels.
• Still image appears if no operation is done for about
MOVIE

20 seconds.
LevelMeter You can select the different level meter patterns.
Audio level meter Meter 1 [Initial] O Meter 2
• Press DISP repeatedly to show the selected level meter.
Pict Download: [Initial]; Download files, [19].
Pictures Set: Activate the stor